Home

Consolidated Hardware Guide

1. MSM module 1 O module slots slots I O module slots Pereme ESD wrist strap A a connector Z 00 00 l 0000 ls j memes ax mor KANS an J dE 7 Si a lhe E LOE UG E T wolo E 0 l S aralle a allies ae LAE d E G 8 E A o 2 0 lo cae o e E i MBs OU Me E lo NE E ab aoo ol a f o aralara 61 ae till g H el a aii allo a S i 000 oe TTE og a a UAOO amp p T o PRS 2D 1000 0 a aaler e aa e i E w 0 a o 7 fa dE a aaa L T BB ia ae Oo O RO ol r z Myo 0 0 700000 00000 0 00 00000 00000 J 0 0 00000000000000 l 0000 l 0000000 0000000000000000000000000000000 0000 0 0 0000000000000000 0 0000 UU Oxor
2. ESD recepiacie Fanitray BlackDiamond P exreme 4 GEMA networks ores el Cle fe ep M R sxx O MSM A PE SSO OSS OOOD OOO SOO OOOO OOO OS module EA slots 2 E p gt EC P o Q c i a gt I g c EE gt Ct c gt l led Se 5 o o E o A A ad a a aao s ogad aadd zo VO ooog oooga ooog S module eS slots M0 eu ea ed We I aM We Ist S 4 o c i B a a r Ge Pee eee Peer ers Serres Bo OC C000 000000 000000 000000000 0000000000 0 quieter COT rv p CO Obocour U U Oncor Ovcw f f Osen saat UUUUUUUU scar Power supplies f f U U U W l i D T O 9 O ANAA A oO o a o o Sim Do 6804chas 2 04 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Chassis BlackDiamond 6804 Switch Rear View The rear of the BlackDiamond 6804 switch provides e The chass
3. o Alpine gB ann o lo Airflow YY o A A h jo iy through wu chassis Airflow _ o through chassis p a a m o _ Je gt Figure 6 Airflow through the Alpine 3802 chassis v oh m mpe a KY Riso V WON ON Airflow Y ANY through WN DA chassis SN Airflow through chassis 38_air4 3802air Meeting Site Requirements Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 41 Site Preparation The airflow of the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis moves through the power supplies and is independent of the airflow through the modules as shown in Figure 7 Figure 8 and Figure 9 For example if the power supply fans fail the airflow through the module area of the chassis will not cool down the power supplies e Airflow for cooling power supplies moves front to back as you face the chassis e Airflow for cooling modules moves left to right as you face the chassis Figure 7 Airflow through the BlackDiamond 6816 chassis
4. Ejector injector handle i o ma ii mi Network processors p and heat sinks von Network interface ports Two on OC 12 PoS module Four on OC 3 PoS module Port status LED T one per port oN foo Service ports eS SSS AA f _ General Purpose Processor GPP PoS_002 Software Requirements The PoS modules require that you run ExtremeWare 7 0 or later on both the MSM module and the PoS module BootROM 7 8 for the MSM module and BootROM 1 18 for the PoS module For more information about the software requirements PoS module features and PoS module configurations see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Hardware Requirements RELA 1 The PoS modules are compatible with i series MSMs only For the most current list of I O modules supported for use with the PoS modules consult your release notes PoS modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet I O module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly Extreme N
5. BD_028 220 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply AC Power Cable and Plug Use the appropriate AC power cable and plug for your switch and your location See Wiring Closet Considerations on page 37 for more information about the types of power cords to use Figure 104 shows the BlackDiamond 6800 series 220 VAC power cable and plug Figure 104 BlackDiamond 220 VAC power cable and plug Wider prong BD_220cord Figure 105 shows the BlackDiamond 6800 series 110 VAC power cable and plug Figure 105 BlackDiamond 110 VAC power cable and plug Wider prong BD_110cord See Preparing the DC Cabling on page 222 for details about the 48 VDC power cable and plug Selecting the DC Cabling Use the following guidelines when selecting cabling for the DC power supplies e Each DC power supply requires dedicated 55 A service e For DC power cables use 4 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 221 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies Preparing the DC Cabling Use the following guidelines when preparing cabling for the DC power supplies e Each DC power supply requires dedicated 60 A service e For DC power cables use 4 AWG high strand count copper wire cable with dual hole lugs that fit over M6 metric
6. 010 000 O0000000 Port status LEDs Gigabit Ethernet ports SHG_S1T Figure 16 Front view of the Summit1i switch with 1000BASE SX ports 1000 Mbps ports Unit status LEDs Port status LEDs Gigabit Ethernet ports SHG_S1SX GBIC Ports Both Summitli switch models provide two unpopulated GBIC ports with SC connectors You can use the following GBICs in the Summitli switch e 1000BASE SX e 1000BASE LX e 1000BASE LX70 e ZX GBIC e LX100 e UTP GBIC 66 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit1i Switch Front View GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 21 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC type Table 21 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 nmoptical window 50 125 pm multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical wind
7. Airflow through chassis ha ha is Na 3 1 Airflow through power supplies 42 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Meeting Site Requirements Figure 8 Airflow through the BlackDiamond 6808 chassis BD_027 A S88 opec SS 2 3 a2 1 Q SLB ssc fa Ss 3 z5 z ta TTT 43 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Site Preparation Figure 9 Airflow through the BlackDiamond 6804 chassis r e 5 n O Airflow Airflow C from through fan tray modules N o U Airflow through power supplies
8. Adequate slack and bend radius SPG_008 Fiber Optic Cable Fiber optic cable must be treated gently during installation Every cable has a minimum bend radius for example and fibers will be damaged if the cables are bent too sharply It is also important not to stretch the cable during installation We recommend that the bend radius for fiber optic cable equals 2 inch 5 08 cm minimum for each 90 degree turn as shown in Figure 13 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 49 Site Preparation A NOTE Kinks and sharp bends can destroy or impair the cable s ability to convey light pulses accurately from one end of the cable to the other Use care in dressing the optical fiber cables provide satisfactory strain relief to support the cable and maintain an adequate bend radius at all cable turns particularly where the cable connects to the I O module Figure 13 Bend radius for fiber optic cable Minimum 2 in 5 08cm radius in 90 bend Optical fiber cable SPG_002 Cable Distances Table 18 shows cable media types and maximum distances that support reliable transmission in accordance with international standards except where noted Table 18 Media types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Distance Standard Media Type Rating Meters 1000BASE SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 aed optical 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220
9. 184 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray Removing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 fan trays are hot swappable You do not need to turn off power to an Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 switch to remove a fan tray You need the following tools and equipment to remove a fan tray e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver A CAUTION Only trained service personnel should perform service to Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 fan trays Before installing or removing any components or carrying out any maintenance procedures see Appendix A To remove the fan tray from the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 switch 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 Unscrew the two captive screws that secure the fan tray to the chassis by turning them counterclockwise to the left 3 Use the finger grips to pull the fan tray out of the chassis approximately 1 inch 2 54 cm as shown in Figure 85 and Figure 86 this step disconnects the power and causes the fans to stop rotating Figure 85 Alpine 3808 fan tray Finger grips aS 38_fanx8 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 185 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Fan Tray Figure 86 Alpine 3804 fan tray Sg Finger grips IN
10. Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 71 Summit Switch Models power supplies fails the second power supply provides all power needs which ensures uninterrupted network operation A NOTE Summit5i switch power supplies must be serviced by personnel trained by Extreme Networks only Label The label on the rear of the Summit5i switch displays important information about your switch Write down your switch information before you install the switch e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device Reset Button Use the reset button to cycle the switch down and bring the switch back up without powering off the switch Your saved switch configuration information is not lost unsaved switch configurations are lost Use a non conductive tool to push the reset button Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector to attach a terminal and access the CLI via a serial connection Use the console port for local management Management Port Use the management port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet RJ 45 connector to plug an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the switch for out of band management This provides you with direct access into the switch and allo
11. Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Extreme Networks Inc 3585 Monroe Street Santa Clara California 95051 888 257 3000 http Awww extremenetworks com Published August 2003 Part number 100093 00 Rev 05 2003 Extreme Networks Inc All rights reserved Extreme Networks ExtremeWare BlackDiamond and Alpine are registered trademarks of Extreme Networks Inc in the United States and certain other jurisdictions ExtremeWare Vista ExtremeWorks ExtremeAssist ExtremeAssist1 ExtremeAssist2 PartnerAssist Extreme Standby Router Protocol ESRP SmartTraps Summit Summitli Summit5i Summit7i Summit24 Summit48 Summit48i Summit Virtual Chassis SummitLink SummitGbX SummitRPS and the Extreme Networks logo are trademarks of Extreme Networks Inc which may be registered or pending registration in certain jurisdictions The Extreme Turbodrive logo is a service mark of Extreme Networks which may be registered or pending registration in certain jurisdictions All other registered trademarks trademarks and service marks are property of their respective owners Specifications are subject to change without notice All other registered trademarks trademarks and service marks are property of their respective owners For safety compliance information see Appendix A Authors Megan Mahar Julie Laccabue Production Megan Mahar Julie Laccabue Contents Part 1 Chapter 1 Preface Introduction Convention
12. Making Network Interface Cable Connections Use the appropriate type of cable to connect the ports of your switch to another switch or router Working carefully one port at a time follow these steps 1 Verify that you have identified the correct cable for the port 2 Use an alcohol wipe or other appropriate cleaning agent to clean the cable connectors make sure they are free of dust oil and other contaminants 3 If you are using optical fiber cable align the transmit Tx and receive Rx connectors with the correct corresponding connectors on the switch or the I O module On the ATM and PoS modules the transmit Tx connector on each port is the top connector 4 Press the cable connectors into their mating connectors on the switch or I O module until the cable connector is firmly seated 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the remaining cables on this or other switches or I O modules 6 Dress and secure the cable bundle to provide appropriate strain relief and protection against bends and kinks Meeting Power Requirements This section discusses power requirements including e Power Supply Requirements e AC Power Cable Requirements e Uninterruptable Power Supply Requirements 52 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Meeting Power Requirements For more information about the power specifications of the Extreme Networks family of switches see Appendix B Switch Technical Specifications on page 299 Powe
13. e MSM specifications on page 319 e G8Xi G8Ti and G12SXi module specifications on page 320 e G16X3 and G24T module specifications on page 321 e WDMi module specifications on page 322 e 10GLRi module specifications on page 323 e F48Ti and F96Ti module specifications on page 325 e F32Fi module specifications on page 326 e PoS module specifications on page 327 e ARM module specifications on page 328 e MPLS module specifications on page 329 e ATM module specifications on page 330 Specifications common to all modules e Common Module Specifications on page 331 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 309 Module Technical Specifications The technical specifications for the Alpine modules are listed in Table 94 through Table 102 The technical specifications for the BlackDiamond modules are listed in Table 103 through Table 114 Specifications common to all modules are listed in Table 115 Alpine Modules Table 94 SMMi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 0 inches 2 5 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 4 lbs 1 8 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11
14. 323 328 330 306 306 306 326 325 325 315 315 314 314 316 320 321 321 320 320 312 312 311 311 311 313 329 319 327 310 299 322 318 317 317 39 44 342 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide floor coverings grounding humidity temperature wiring terminals WM 1T3i module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight WM 4E1i module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight WM 4T1i module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight X XENPAK module 317 276 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 343 344 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide
15. 5 While holding the empty chassis secure it with a minimum of eight suitable screws depending on the model e BlackDiamond 6816 is shown in Figure 94 e BlackDiamond 6808 is shown in Figure 95 e BlackDiamond 6804 is shown in Figure 96 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 207 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis Figure 94 Securing the BlackDiamond 6816 chassis in a rack wy a A o E EE As ow rads os 2 3 4 5 s 7 8 A 8 ole c 5 5 Eile 7 Ilo o ho h he hs ha hs hs 1s 5 5 io ow e T I lb cT T ole 5 5 Poa cc o o a Lyd BD_rack16 208 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Figure 95 Securing the BlackDiamond 6808 chassis in a rack Wy Aq O fo A O00 000000000000 C0000 OED TON TOR OIE N o oO Ld Lyd BD Ww oO oO D oO atone ae AES ga D OJ Wg 7 J e e ID OJ Cad s w IO OJ a D OJ D N C p oO Koo Ly A 6804rack 6 After you secure the chassis remove the helper bracket Store it for future use for example if you need to remove the chassis Installing the Chassis Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 209 BlackDiamond 680
16. A o l e ES Q Q o aata aa aaa BARR ROR CRoRER RR RO REE RRR Ro amp LERES KERERE RKS E A 0 a 2a ere EERI CHO CO PO BR RR EEEE EET gt SOOO RRR Aes ERRER ERRA RRR ERR oe p o DOIS o 0 COREE o SEEN o o I oO O 4 amp E amp BD_fanx 4 Allow the fan blades to stop spinning before removing the fan tray completely a A WARNING Keep your hands your away from rotating fan blades 5 Repeat this procedure for additional fan trays if applicable 6 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray BlackDiamond 6800 series fan trays are hot swappable You do not need to turn off power to a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch to install a fan tray You need the following tools and equipment to install a fan tray e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement fan tray A CAUTION Only trained service personnel should perform service to BlackDiamond fan trays Before installing or removing any components or carrying out any maintenance procedures see Appendix A 284 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray To install a fan tray into the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle
17. e Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode PIM SM e Wire speed IPX IPX RIP and IPX SAP e Server Load Balancing SLB e RADIUS client and per command authentication e TACACS e Console command line interface CLI connection e Telnet CLI connection e SSH2 connection TM e ExtremeWare Vista Web based management interface e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 60 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Remote Monitoring RMON Adjustable fan speed based on the temperature of the switch Summit48si only Summit 200 Series VLANs including support for IEEE 802 10 and IEEE 802 1p STP IEEE 802 1D QoS including support for IEEE 802 1p MAC QoS and four hardware queues Wire speed IP routing DHCP BOOTP Relay NAT ESRP Aware support EAPS support RIP version 1 and RIP version 2 OSPF routing protocol DiffServ support Access policy support for routing protocols Access list support for packet filtering Access list support for rate limiting IGMP snooping to control IP multicast traffic Load sharing on multiple ports RADIUS client and per command authentication support TACACS support Network Login CLI connection Telnet CLI connection SSH2 connection SNMP Remote Monitoring RMON Traffic mirroring for ports Summary of Features Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 61 Summit Switch Overview Memory Requirements EU Your i series Summit switch must hav
18. fe fe Grounding studs BD_rri6s BlackDiamond 6808 Switch Front View The BlackDiamond 6808 switch consists of the following components e One 10 slot chassis with backplane e Eight I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 8 e Two MSM64i slots labeled slots A and B 200 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Architecture Two power supply bays accessed from the front of the unit One fan tray accessed from the rear of the unit One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector The BlackDiamond 6808 switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of port configurations 672 switched 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet ports 224 switched 100BASE FX Fast Ethernet ports 96 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports 128 switched 1000BASE X oversubscribed ports 168 switched 10 100 1000BASE T oversubscribed ports 28 OC3 PoS ports 28 OC3 ATM ports 14 OC12 PoS ports A NOTE PoS and ATM modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet VO module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly Figure 89 shows the front view of the BlackDiamond 6808 chassis installed with two MSMs and ten optional I O modules Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 201 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis Figure 89 Front view of the BlackDiamond 6808 switch with sample I O modules
19. 1 Unplug the power cable s from the from the wall outlet s and then from the switch 2 Disconnect the Summit switch from the redundant power supply if applicable 104 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing the Switch from a Rack 3 If you are removing a Summit7i switch mount the helper bracket in the rack directly beneath the switch using four screws that are appropriate for your rack 4 Unscrew the chassis from the rack 5 Have a minimum of two people gently remove the chassis from the rack and place it on a secure flat surface with the front of the chassis facing you 6 Unscrew the helper bracket and remove it from the rack Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 105 Summit Switch Installation 106 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A Part 4 Alpine Switch Alpine 3800 Series Switch Overview The Alpine 3800 series switch is a chassis based Ethernet service provisioning switch designed for edge and aggregation applications The Alpine 3800 series switch is flexible and scalable making it easy for you to meet the changing requirements of your network The combination of BlackDiamond Alpine and Summit switches delivers a consistent end to end network solution that provides a nonblocking architecture wire speed switching wire speed IP routing and policy based Quality of Service QoS This chapter describes e Summary of Features on page 109 e Switch Components on
20. 303 Switch Technical Specifications Table 91 Alpine 3800 series switch specifications Physical Dimensions Alpine Switches Alpine 3808 Height 21 inches 53 30 cm Width 17 32 inches 44 cm Depth 11 375 inches 28 90 cm Weight empty chassis 50 pounds 22 7 kg Weight fully loaded chassis 98 pounds 44 5 kg Weight each power supply 14 pounds 6 4 kg Weight each module 3 pounds 1 4 kg Alpine 3804 Height 10 5 inches 26 65 cm Width 17 32 inches 44 cm Depth 15 53 inches 39 42 cm Weight empty chassis 30 pounds 13 6 kg Weight fully loaded chassis 68 pounds 30 9 kg Weight each power supply 14 pounds 6 4 kg Weight each module 3 pounds 1 4 kg Alpine 3802 Height 7 inches 17 78 cm Width 17 32 inches 44 cm Depth 12 inches 30 48 cm Weight empty chassis 30 pounds 13 6 kg Weight fully loaded chassis 40 pounds 18 1 kg Weight each module 3 pounds 1 4 kg Safety Certifications and Standards UL 1950 3rd Edition listed Alpine 3802 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed cUL listed to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Alpine 3802 IEC 60950 1999 3rd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility EMI EMC Certifications and Standards FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN
21. Ground the rack mount the chassis in a rack and ground the chassis before installing any switch components Complete the following tasks before installing any switch components e Ground the rack For more information about grounding the rack see Protective Grounding for the Rack on page 46 134 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply e Mount the chassis in a rack For more information about mounting the chassis see Installing the Chassis on page 124 e Ground the chassis For more information about grounding the chassis see Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis on page 127 To turn on power to the system connect the power cable to the power supply and then to the wall outlet In the event of a power supply failure please contact Extreme Networks about servicing and replacing your power supply A NOTE Alpine 3802 power supplies must be removed and replaced by personnel that have been trained by Extreme Networks Verifying a Successful Installation After you supply power to the Alpine switch the switch performs a power on self test POST During the POST e All ports are temporarily disabled e The packet LED is off e The power LED is on e The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST If the switch passes the POST the MGMT LED blinks at a slow rate one blink per second If the switch fail
22. S ea SSS SSS 2233 SSS SSS SSS SSS 333 SSS SSS S23 e Csr Bs SSS Bg l T SPG_003 Rack Specifications and Recommendations Racks should conform to conventional standards In the United States use EIA Standard RS 310C Racks Panels and Associated Equipment In countries other than the United States use IEC Standard 297 In addition verify that your rack meets the basic mechanical and space requirements that are described in this section Mechanical Recommendations for the Rack Use distribution racks that meet the following mechanical recommendations e Use an open style 19 inch 48 26 cm rack to facilitate easy maintenance and to provide proper ventilation e The rack should use the universal mounting rail hole pattern that is identified in IEC Standard 297 e The mounting holes should be flush with the rails to accommodate the chassis e Use a rack made of steel or aluminum Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 45 Site Preparation e Install equipment into the lower half of the rack first to avoid making the rack top heavy e The rack should support approximately 600 pounds 272 kilograms Protective Grounding for the Rack Use a rack grounding kit and a ground conductor that is c
23. S sizkiat t H OO g 00 ae 11020 H 00 BD_034 218 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply Figure 101 Installing an AC power supply in a BlackDiamond 6808 or a BlackDiamond 6804 BD_033 AR CAUTION Do not handle the power supply using the DC output bus bars Support the power supply from the bottom while holding the handle on the front of the power supply unit Figure 102 DC output bus bars and connectors on a BlackDiamond power supply Connectors Bus bars ionencncusuonoeas ll A EE 4 If you are installing a DC power supply you must prepare the DC power ee BE before you install the power supply See Preparing the DC Cabling on page 222 for more details A DC power supply in the BlackDiamond 6816 switch is shown in Figure 100 5 To support the power supply place both hands under the power supply to check the connectors for dust and packing materials
24. e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN VLANid and so forth Table 83 describes the specifications for the P3cSi P3cMi P12cSi and P12cMi optical interfaces Table 83 Optical interface specifications for the PoS modules Parameter P3cSi P3cMi P12cSi P12cMi Power budget 13 dB 9 dB 13 dB 10 dB Operating wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm Transmit distance 15 km 9 32 mi 2 km 1 24 mi 15 km 9 32 mi 500 m 0 31 mi Physical Description This section describes the components and the LEDs of the PoS module as shown in Figure 129 The PoS module has the following key components e Two high performance network processors e A General Purpose Processor GPP subsystem jr The network processors are programmable devices that participate with the Extreme support expanded functionality features and flexibility chipset to Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 259 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules The GPP subsystem handles system control and I O module management functions The GPP subsystem resides outside of the I O module data path to optimize performance PoS Module LED Indicators The PoS modules are equipped with two module level LED indicators STATUS and DIAG and one port level LED indicator for each network interface port on the PoS module as shown in Figure 129 e STATUS LED Located near the top end of the PoS module front panel near the ejector injector handle This LED indicator
25. e Is added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherits the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth The GM WDMi module transmits bi directionally on the fiber cable and then multiplexes these wavelengths over the single mode optical fiber The total optical system budget for the GM WDMi module is 12 dB Measure cable plant losses with a 1550 nm light source to verify that your cable plant losses are within the optical budget Table 45 describes the optical specifications for the GM WDMi module Table 45 GM WDMii optical interface specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transmitter Optical output power 5 dBm 3 dBm 1 dBm Channel 1 wavelength 1495 nm 1501 nm 1507 nm Channel 2 wavelength 1515 nm 1521 nm 1527 nm Channel 3 wavelength 1535 nm 1541 nm 1547 nm Channel 4 wavelength 1555 nm 1561 nm 1567 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 17 dBm Optical input power maximum 1 dBm Fiber Optic Cable Back reflection 25 dB General Total system budget 12 dBm 158 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Extreme Networks recommends that you reserve 3 dB for losses due to cable splices connectors and operating margin Table 46 describes the cable attenuation cable budget and operating distance for a variety of cable attentuation ratings for the GM WDMi module Table 46 GM WDMi maximum transmit distances Cable Attenuation Cable Budget Maximum Dist
26. e Telnet CLI connection e ExtremeWare Vista Web based management interface e SNMP support Port Connections The BlackDiamond 6800 series switches support the following port configurations that are available on the different BlackDiamond I O modules as described in Table 59 A CAUTION Modules that use SX LX and LX70 interfaces contain Class 1 laser devices The P3cSi P3cMi P12cSi P12cMi A3cSi A3cMi and WDMi modules also use Class 1 laser devices These ports can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam Table 59 Port configurations available on BlackDiamond I O modules Ethernet Ports 10BASE T 100BASE T Module 100BASE TX 1000BASE T GBIC 1000BASE SX 100BASE FX OTHER G8Ti 8 G8Xi 8 G12SXi 12 G16X3 16 Mini GBIC G24T3 242 WDMi 1 10 Gbps 10GLRi 1 10GBASE LR 8 F32T 32 F48Ti 48 192 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Switch Components Table 59 Port configurations available on BlackDiamond I O modules continued Ethernet Ports 10BASE T 100BASE T Module 100BASE TX 1000BASE T GBIC 1000BASE SX 100BASE FX OTHER F96Ti 96 F32Fi 32 P3cSi 4 OC 3 P3cMi 4 OC 3 P12cSi 2 OC 12 P12cMi 2 OC 12 ARM N A MPLS N A A3cSi 4 OC 3 A3cMi 4 OC 3 1 The G16X supports 1000BASE X 2 The G24TS supports 10 100 1000BASE T autonegotiation 3 The 10GLRi module is a single slot I O module for the BlackDiamond 6808 chassis No chassis upgrade is required and the MSM64i management modu
27. 18 AWG 1 5 mm 2 Type SVT or SJT 3 conductor The cable set must have a rated current capacity of at least the amount rated for each specific product The attachment plug must be an Earth grounding type with a NEMA 5 15P 10 A 125 V configuration Denmark The supply plug must comply with section 107 2 D1 standard DK2 1a or DK2 5a Switzerland The supply plug must comply with SEV ASE 1011 Argentina The supply plug must comply with Argentinian standards Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 53 Site Preparation A NOTE When using dual power supplies make sure that each AC power supply attaches to an independent power source Replacing the Power Cable If the power cable plug is unsuitable and must be replaced connect the power supply wires for the switch according to the following scheme e Brown wire to the Live Line plug terminal which may be marked with the letter L or colored red e Blue wire to the Neutral plug terminal which may be marked with the letter N or colored black e Yellow Green wire to the Ground plug terminal which may be marked with the letter E the Earth symbol or colored yellow green Uninterruptable Power Supply Requirements An uninterruptible power supply UPS is a device that sits between a power supply such as a wall outlet and a device such as a switch to prevent outages sags surges and bad harmonics from adversely affecting the performa
28. 2000 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 325 Module Technical Specifications Table 110 F32Fi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 5 0 Ibs 2 27 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 326 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond Modules Table 111 PoS module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 i
29. 6 Gently begin to slide the power supply into the power supply bay Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 219 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies AR CAUTION Do not slam the power supply into the backplane Use the locking handle to secure the power supply unit into the chassis 7 Secure the power supply in a BlackDiamond 6816 by pushing right on the locking handle until it clicks in place Secure the power supply in a BlackDiamond 6808 or BlackDiamond 6804 by pushing down on the locking handle until it clicks in place 8 Tighten the screws using a 1 Phillips screwdriver 9 To turn on power to the system connect the power cables to the power supplies and then to the wall outlet If you have a DC power supply e Remove the plexiglass cover e Attach the power cables e Turn the on off switch to the on position See Attaching the DC Cabling on page 222 for more information about how to attach the DC cabling to the power supply 10 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install additional power supplies repeat steps 1 through 9 Figure 103 Installing a second power supply in a BlackDiamond 6808 or a BlackDiamond 6804
30. 70 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit5i Switch Rear View Table 22 GBIC types and maximum distances continued Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters A NOTE For more information about the supported GBIC types see GBIC Specifications on page 25 LEDs All three Summit5i models have the following LEDs e Unit status e Management e Port status e Port speed e Management port For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summit5i switch see Summitli Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i Switch LEDs on page 77 Summit5i Switch Rear View Figure 21 shows the rear view for the Summit5i switch Figure 21 Rear view of the Summit5i switch AC Connectors Label Reset button Console port amp C USTED Ethernet port SHG Res Power Sockets The Summit5i switch supports up to two power supplies Each power supply has its own power socket When a second power supply is installed and connected to a second independent power source both provide a redundant load shared power source to the Summit5i switch If one of the power sources or
31. Common switch specifications Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 10 to 70 C 14 to 158 F Alpine 3802 only Operating Humidity 10 to 95 relative humidity noncondensing Standards EN60068 to Extreme IEC68 schedule Certification Marks CE European Community TUV GS German Notified Body TUV S Argentina GOST Russian Federation ACN 090 029 066 C Tick Australian Communication Authority OA Underwriters Laboratories USA and Canada Par MIC South Korea BSMI Republic of Taiwan ea NOM Mexican Official Normalization Electronic Certification NOM fi and Normalization 308 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Module Technical Specifications This appendix describes the technical specifications for both the Alpine and the BlackDiamond modules Alpine modules e SMMi module specifications on page 310 e GM 4Ti GM 4Xi and GM 4Si module specifications on page 311 e GM 16X3 and GM 16T module specifications on page 312 e GM WDMi module specifications on page 313 e FM 32Ti and FM 24Ti module specifications on page 314 e FM 24S5Fi and FM 24MFi module specifications on page 315 e FM 8Vi module specifications on page 316 e WM 4T1i and WM 4E1i module specifications on page 317 e WM 1T3i module specifications on page 318 BlackDiamond modules
32. D ae O Power WHEN INSTALLED IN 3808 THIS WAY UP supply a a Esp AN AMA SIL YORE METH NEHM wrist strap 2 I be ue connector AlpineS 3 0 S ola Fan tray Oo I o ee Cc M M sw SMMi m es fl module slot GMS e E Oh arm cere r A C r m a z z z Cmax J aM UM ws Of Lo Mone O module e BD eo a a O O ss 5 z a J DPAnAtTARA AAAAAAAA 5 mae HBHSSHEan tte hha See ye E LIITE TTT EITT re fi ey ser lo E CITE CTT E ITT Ope 38_3808 116 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3808 Switch Rear View Figure 47 shows the rear view of the Alpine 3808 switch Figure 47 Rear view of the Alpine 3808 switch Label Grounding studs The rear view of the Alpine 3808 switch provides Access to the grounding studs The chassis serial number The Ethernet MAC address of the switch Symbols of safety certification Alpine 3804 Switch Front View The Alpine 3804 switch consists of the following components One 5 slot chassis with backplane Four I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 4 One SMMi slot One or two power supplies accessed from the rear of the unit One fan tray One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector Alpine 3800 Series Architecture Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 117 Alpine 3800 S
33. Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you install the power supply and modules after you mount the chassis in a rack The Alpine 3802 chassis is shipped with a preinstalled power supply and fan tray For your safety due to the increased weight of the chassis after components are installed and to prevent damage to the equipment Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you install the I O modules after you mount the chassis in a rack A NOTE Mount the chassis in a rack before installing any switch components 124 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Chassis Rack Installation To mount the Alpine 3800 series chassis into a standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack you need the following tools equipment and resources e Helper bracket provided e A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket not provided e If you have an Alpine 3808 or 3804 a minimum of eight appropriate screws not provided to secure the chassis into the rack e If you have an Alpine 3802 a minimum of four appropriate screws not provided to secure the chassis into the rack e 1 Phillips screwdriver e A minimum of two people to help install the chassis into the rack To mount the chassis into a rack 1 Mount the helper bracket in the lowest available position in the rack using four appropriate screws not provided as shown in Figure 54 Figure 54 Helper bracket for mounting the Alpine 3800 series chassi
34. Safety Information Before you begin the process of installing or replacing a mini GBIC read the safety information in this section AR CAUTION Mini GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam Mini GBICs are class 1 laser devices and they operate at 3 3 V Use only Extreme Networks certified mini GBIC devices If you see an amber blinking mini GBIC port status LED after you install a mini GBIC into the Summit48si or Summit 200 series switch BlackDiamond G16X module or an Alpine GM 16X3 module this means the mini GBIC is not certified by Extreme Networks To correct this problem install an Extreme Networks certified mini GBIC available from Extreme Networks mini GBIC port If you install a mini GBIC not certified by Extreme Networks into an Alpine GM 16X3 module and insert a cable to bring up the link the port status LED remains off and an error specifying the use of a non Extreme Networks certified mini GBIC is sent to the syslog To view the syslog and to determine why the link is down use the show log command To correct this problem install an Extreme Networks certified mini GBIC available from Extreme Networks into the mini GBIC slot in the module Preparing to Install or Replace a Mini GBIC To ensure proper installation complete the following five tasks before inserting the mini GBIC 1 Disable the port that is needed to install or replace the mini GBIC 2 Inspect and clean the
35. Status Green blinking Normal operation Amber blinking Configuration error code version error diagnostic failure or other severe module error Off No power DIAG Off Normal operation Amber blinking Diagnostics in progress Amber Diagnostic failure Port x Green Link up Green blinking Link disabled Amber blinking Activity on link returning to green Amber blinking Link down SONET link problem Off No received signal 1 If you have a PoS module the link is up but the PPP VLAN interface might not be up To determine whether PPP is up use the show ppp command to display PPP status information 272 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing I O Modules Table 87 BlackDiamond ARM and MPLS module LEDs LED Color Indicates Status Flashing green Normal operation Flashing amber Configuration error code version error diagnostic failure or other severe module error Off No power DIAG Green Normal operation Flashing amber Diagnostics in progress Amber Diagnostic failure Installing I O Modules You can insert I O modules at any time without causing disruption of network services Complete the action of inserting a BlackDiamond I O module in a reasonable time frame Be sure to insert the module completely to avoid partial insertion or connection of backplane connectors You need the following tools and equipment to install an I O module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e I O module
36. UUUUUUUUUUUU UUUUUU Oxor Oxn Ovcn Power supplies 5 i i q O O o Zia o Biia BD_6808 BlackDiamond 6808 Switch Rear View The rear of the BlackDiamond 6808 switch provides e Access to the fan tray e The chassis serial number e The Ethernet MAC address of the switch e Symbols of safety certification 202 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Architecture Figure 90 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 6808 switch Figure 90 Rear view of the BlackDiamond 6808 switch U J U J gt gt QANQQAMQ RBRRARRAR L RRL E FARR RRR RY RRA RRR PRR R RRR Bee EEE ED RBRRKEKRRERRRQ RHH RRR RET THREE EHH OOOO CHEE RRR ERERRE SHH OH CE RRR RRE RER RRR RR RRE gt HHH T RRRRRHRRRR HRRRRRRRRI RRR RRRRERI HH RERE RERRE SHEE CHE HH CHEE RERE ese CHOOSE CH BHD CHO Penccesecececocecesn OCHRE CCH H HHH Fan tray PART No SERIAL No MAC Address Label OREO Grounding studs S on a AR ARAARANANBRAAT A i S BD_rr08 B
37. e Appropriate type of cable for the I O module you plan to install To install an I O module 1 Select a slot for the module e Slots numbered 1 through 16 in the BlackDiamond 6816 chassis e Slots numbered 1 through 8 in the BlackDiamond 6808 chassis e Slots numbered 1 through 4 in the BlackDiamond 6804 chassis AR CAUTION You can install I O modules only in slots 1 through 16 in the BlackDiamond 6816 slots 1 through 8 in the BlackDiamond 6808 or slots 1 through 4 on the BlackDiamond 6804 I O modules do not fit in slots A B C or D Forceful insertion can damage the I O module 2 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel 3 Remove the blank faceplate from the slot to make room for the module if applicable A NOTE Any unoccupied module slot in the chassis should have a blank faceplate installed to ensure satisfactory protection from EMI and to guarantee adequate airflow through the chassis Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 273 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules 4 Grasp the module by its front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the edge of the metal panel to support the weight of the module Check the connectors for dust and packing materials A CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the P
38. e Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply on page 131 e Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply on page 133 e Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 AC Power Supply on page 134 e Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply on page 135 e Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply on page 140 e Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 DC Power Supply on page 141 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install remove or supply power to any Alpine power supply The Alpine 3800 series chassis accommodates two types power supplies e AC Auto sense for 110 and 220 VAC power e DC Requires 48 VDC nominal input line voltage If you install two power supplies in the switch both installed power supplies must be of the same type When two power supplies are present the power is load shared between the supplies for enhanced longevity Insert the power supplies for the Alpine 3800 series switch into the following locations e Alpine 3808 Front of the chassis e Alpine 3804 Lower rear of the chassis e Alpine 3802 Preinstalled at the factory and are not user removable Table 37 describes the supported power supplies for the Alpine 3800 series switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 129 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies Table 37 Supported power supplies for the Alpine 3800 series switch Switch Model
39. not a supported configuration e An SNMP trap message will be sent when the power supply is hot swapped You can remove or install Summit48si power supplies one at a time without interrupting operation and each power supply has its own power socket which allows you to connect independent power sources for each power supply One functioning power supply must always be installed Two power supplies operate in a load sharing manner and increase the reliability of the switch A NOTE You can use either DC or AC power supplies in the Summit48si but you can not install an AC and a DC power supply in the same switch See Chapter 5 for information about removing and installing power supplies 82 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit48si Power Supply LEDs Figure 30 Summit48si AC power supply PSU status LEDs Power socket Serial Number CAUTION Di 7 450070 00 XX Disconnect power cor Q A prior to removal of PSU A 100 240 V CAUTION Disconnect all power 3 0 A Max cords to disable system power 50 60 Hz Figure 31 Summit48si DC power supply 48si_psu If one of the power supplies fails or if source power to one of the power supplies fails the second power supply takes over ensuring uninterrupted network operation The switch also sends e A message to the syslog telling you which power supply failed e An SNMP trap to your network management software both wh
40. 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters A NOTE For more information about the supported GBIC types see GBIC Specifications on page 25 LEDs The G8Xi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G8Xi module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 240 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules G12SXi Module Figure 117 shows the G12SXi module Figure 117 G12SXi module ee _t Module status LEDs ss Port status LEDs 1000 Mbps ports s AAAA 00 O EW_G12SXi The G12SXi module has 12 Gigabit Ethernet ports that use sta
41. 314 173 316 316 316 316 316 97 336 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide full duplex 20 GM 4Ti module 153 dimensions 311 G electromagnetic compatibility 311 environmental standard 311 G12SXi module 241 Wea ts telecommunications standard 311 dimensions 320 weiht 311 electromagnetic compatibility 320 GM yas dule 154 environmental standard 320 dimensi ns 311 telecommunications standard 320 1 ibili 11 weight 320 electromagnetic compatibility 3 environmental standard 311 G16X3 module 242 ants telecommunications standard 311 dimensions 321 weight 311 electromagnetic compatibility 321 A Ni mod l 158 environmental standard 321 dimensions 313 weight 321 electromagnetic compatibilit 313 G24T3 module 245 gn P y environmental standard 313 dimensions 321 Rete ee telecommunications standard 313 electromagnetic compatibility 321 weiht 313 environmental standard 321 GPP A steni weight 321 y ARM module 262 G8Ti module 238 ATM module 269 dimensions A MPLS module 265 electromagnetic compatibility 320 PoS tiodule 260 environmental standard 320 E Ge grounding 55 telecommunications standard 320 f Alpine chassis 127 weight 320 h BlackDiamond chassis 210 G8Xi module 239 rounding the rack 46 dimensions 320 8 8 electromagnetic compatibility 320 environmental standard 320 H telecommunications standard 320 hardware address 91 weight 320 Summitli switch 68 GBIC Summit48i switch 80 identif
42. 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 1000BASE LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 Adn optical 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 1000BASE LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window 100BASE FX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 2000 ea optical 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 2000 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 400 2000 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 2000 50 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements Table 18 Media types and maximum distances continued Mhz Km Maximum Distance Standard Media Type Rating Meters 1000BASE T Category 5 and higher UTP cable 100 100BASE TX Category 5 and higher UTP cable 100 10BASE T Category 3 and higher UTP cable 100 Proprietary to Extreme Networks Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces that use 10 125 um single mode fiber can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters RJ 45 Connector Jackets Use RJ 45 cable with connector jackets that are flush with the connector or that have connectors with a no snag feature Using cable with jackets that are wider than the connectors can cause e Connectors that are not properly aligned with the port e Crowded cable installation which can cause connectors to pop out of the port Figure 14 shows examples of connector jacket types that are not recomme
43. A Part 7 Appendixes Safety Information Important Safety Information A A WARNING Read the following safety information thoroughly before installing your Extreme Networks switch Failure to follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment Installation maintenance and removal of a switch chassis or its components must be done by qualified service personnel only Qualified service personnel have had appropriate technical training and experience that is necessary to be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed when performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other people You should consider the following before unpacking your equipment e Install the equipment in a secured enclosed and restricted access area ensuring that only qualified service personnel have access to the equipment e Install the equipment only in a temperature and humidity controlled indoor area that is free of airborne materials that can conduct electricity Too much humidity can cause a fire Too little humidity can produce electrical shock and fire e When you handle the equipment on modular switches put on the ESD wrist strap to reduce the risk of electronic damage to the equipment Leave the ESD strap permanently attached to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Power The Summit series switch has either one
44. AC Power Supply DC Power Supply Hot swappable Alpine 38081 Up to two AC power Up to two DC power Yes supplies can be installed supplies can be installed Alpine 38041 Up to two AC power Up to two DC power Yes supplies can be installed supplies can be installed Alpine 38021 Up to two AC power Two DC power supplies No supplies can be installed 2 must be installed 1 All installation maintenance and removal of a power supply must be done by qualified trained service personnel only 2 If you have one AC power supply installed in the Alpine 3802 switch it must be installed in the lower power supply tray PSU A 3 If you require DC power supplies in the Alpine 3802 switch you must have two DC power supplies installed The Alpine 3800 series switch generates SNMP traps for the following events e AC power source fails e Power supply fails e Power supply is removed For more information about planning your site and power requirements see Meeting Power Requirements in Chapter 2 For more information about the specifications of the Alpine 3800 series switch power supplies see Table 91 on page 304 Power Supply LEDs Table 38 and Table 39 describe LEDs that pertain to power for the Alpine 3800 series switch Table 38 Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 power supply LED LED Color Indicates D C OK Green All DC outputs are operational Off One or more DC outputs have failed Table 39 Alpine 3802 power supply LED LED Co
45. Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 319 Module Technical Specifications Table 104 G8Xi G8Ti and G12SXi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 6 25 lbs 2 81 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC
46. Extreme Networks does not recommend using the port based load sharing link aggregation algorithm when the share has more than four ports because traffic coming from the GM 16X3 or GM 16T modules will only load share over the first four ports of the share Load sharing using other load balancing algorithms can have up to eight links Mini GBIC Ports The GM 16X3 module supports any of the following mini GBICS e SX mini GBIC LX mini GBIC e ZX mini GBIC A NOTE For more information about the supported mini GBIC types see Mini GBIC Types and Specifications on page 20 LEDs The GM 16X3 module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the GM 16X3 module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The GM 16X module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 7 0 1b11 or later and BootROM 7 8 or later on your switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 161 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules GM 16T Module Figure 73 shows the GM 16T module Figure 73 GM 16T module AARG DAAD one a TETE TETE L J Port status LEDs RJ 45 connector ports Module status LED GM16T3 The GM 16T module has 16 10 100 1000BASE T ports using RJ 45 connectors that autonegotiate for 10BASE T 100BASE T or 1000BASE T The GM 16T ports ar
47. G3TIVISNI NIHM 6 O O 38_pwrx4 When you install the power supply open the ejector injector lever and do not slam the power supply into the backplane Failure to do so may cause damage and possibly require the return of the chassis 132 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply 5 Place both hands on each side of the power supply to slowly and evenly slide the power supply into the bay During the last inch of insertion into the chassis place one hand on the central handle to steady the power supply and use your other hand to gently push the ejector injector lever towards the power supply to engage the power supply backplane connectors 6 Secure the power supply by tightening the screw on the ejector injector lever with a 2 Phillips screwdriver 7 To uncover the power connector slide the safety latch to the right 8 To turn on power to the system connect the power cable to the power supply and then to the wall outlet AR CAUTION The power supply cannot be installed if an AC power cable is plugged in You can damage the chassis and power supply if you attempt to install a power supply with an AC power cable connected 9 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install an additional power supply repeat steps 1 thro
48. Hardware Guide Chapter 5 Part 4 Chapter 6 Summit 200 24 Switch Front View Console Port Port Connections LEDs Software Requirements Summit 200 24 Switch Rear View Power Socket Label Summit 200 24 Switch LEDs Summit 200 48 Switch Front View Console Port Port Connections LEDs Software Requirements Summit 200 48 Switch Rear View Power Socket Label Summit 200 48 Switch LEDs Summit Switch Installation Mounting the Switch in a Rack Placing the Switch on a Table or Shelf Verifying a Successful Installation Removing and Installing Summit48si AC Power Supplies Installing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket Removing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket from a Power Cable Installing the Summit48si Switch DC Power Supply Preparing and Attaching the DC Power Supply Cabling Attaching the Connector to the DC Power Supply Removing the Switch from a Rack Alpine Switch Alpine 3800 Series Switch Overview Summary of Features Port Connections Switch Components Alpine 3808 Switch Alpine 3804 Switch 85 86 86 86 87 87 87 87 87 89 89 89 90 90 90 90 90 91 93 97 97 97 99 100 101 103 104 104 109 110 111 111 111 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3802 Switch 112 Power Supply 112 Following Safety Information 112 Chapter 7 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis Alpine 3800 Series Architecture 115 Alpine 3808 Switch Front View 115 Alpine 3808
49. I O Module Installation As the module begins to seat in the chassis the ejector injector levers begin to close b To close the ejector injector levers use both hands simultaneously to push the levers toward the center of the module c To secure the module tighten the two captive screws using a 2 Phillips screwdriver A NOTE Tighten the screws of this module before you insert additional modules Otherwise you might unseat modules that you have not secured 6 Store the module packaging for future use 7 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install additional I O modules repeat steps 1 through 6 Verifying the I O Module Installation After you install an I O module verify that it is working correctly Check the LEDs on the front panel of the I O module and use the show slot lt slot number gt command to display slot specific information about the newly installed module LED Indicators When the I O module and its ports are configured and operating normally the front panel LED indicators should appear as follows e STATUS LED green e DIAG LED WM 4Ti module only off e Port status LED per port Green all modules except WM 4T1i Alternating green and amber WM 4Til module only If you have installed a PoE I O module FM 32Pi and its ports are configured and operating normally the front panel LED in
50. I O module Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 275 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel 2 Use a 1 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two captive screws 3 Simultaneously rotate the ejector injector levers outward to disengage the module from the backplane a Grasp the module front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the metal panel to support the weight of the module A CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors b Slide the module out of the chassis and place it immediately into an antistatic sack to protect it from ESD damage and to prevent dust from collecting on the module s connectors 4 If you are not going to install a replacement I O module cover the slot with a blank faceplate Otherwise follow the I O module installation procedure on page 273 5 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To remove additional I O modules repeat steps 1 through 4 Installing XENPAK Modules This section describes installing and removing the XENPAK module a 10 Gbps optical transceiver You can install or remove the Product Name f
51. ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 MIC Telecom 304 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Heat Dissipation Alpine 3808 1046 W maximum 3600 BTU hr maximum Alpine 3804 577 W maximum 2000 BTU hr maximum Alpine 3802 315 W maximum 1076 BTU hr maximum Power Supplies Alpine 3808 AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Alpine 3804 AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Alpine 3802 AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating 50 Hz to 60 Hz 90 VAC to 264 VAC auto ranging 100 120 VAC 10 A 200 240 VAC 5A 40 70 VDC 30 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz 90 VAC to 264 VAC auto ranging 100 120 VAC 5 6 A 200 240 VAC 2 3 A 40 70 VDC 16 5 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz 90 VAC to 264 VAC auto ranging 100 120 VAC 3 1 A 200 240 VAC 1 3 A 40 70 VDC 7 5 A max 48 VDC 6 5 A Switch Power Off Temperature power off Martek supplies 75 C 167 F Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 305 Switch Technical Specifications Table 92 BlackDiamond 6800 series switch specifications Physi
52. LEDs e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device A NOTE The Summit 200 48 switch certification and safety label is located on the bottom of the switch Summit 200 48 Switch LEDs Table 30 describes the LED behavior on the Summit 200 48 switch Table 30 Summit 200 48 switch LED behavior Unit Status LED MGMT LED Color Indicates Green solid The Summit switch is operating normally Green blinking The Summit switch POST is in progress Amber The Summit switch has failed its POST or an overheat condition is detected Fan LED Color Indicates Green The fan is operating normally Amber blinking A failed condition is present on the fan Port Status LEDs Ports 1 50 Color Indicates Green Link is present port is enabled Green blinking Link is present port is enabled and there is activity on the port Off Link is not present or the port is disabled Media Selection Fiber LEDs Ports 49 and 50 Color Indicates Green Fiber link is selected mini GBIC is present and being used for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink Off 1000BASE T link is selected the switch is using the RJ 45 port for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink A NOTE For more information about configuring and using the Summit200 48 switch see the Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardw
53. LEDs on page 272 238 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules G8Xi Module Figure 116 shows the G8Xi module Figure 116 G8Xi module Module status LEDs 2 gt Gigabit Ethernet ports with status LEDs 00000 CO J xm_eexi The G8Xi module has eight unpopulated GBIC based Gigabit Ethernet ports All Gigabit Ethernet ports on these modules use standard GBIC connectors and support 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE LX70 and 1000BASE ZX The default configuration of the G8Xi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in auto negotiation mode GBIC Ports The G8Xi module supports any of the following GBICs e 1000BASE SX e 1000BASE LX e 1000BASE LX70 e ZX GBIC e LX100 GBIC e UTP GBIC GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 69 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC type Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 239 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Table 69 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX i 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5
54. Never touch the components on the printed circuit board PCB or pins on any of the connectors 5 Ensure that the SMMi is horizontal as shown in Figure 67 with the e Module name to the right e PCB on top e Ejector injector levers extended Figure 67 SMMi with open ejector injector levers sum ops EE 45014 38_clips a Slide the module into the top slot of the chassis until it makes contact with the backplane Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 147 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module A NOTE Use the metal panel not the PCB to guide the SMMi As the module begins to seat in the chassis the ejector injector levers begin to close b To close the ejector injector levers use both hands simultaneously to push the levers toward the center of the module c To secure the module tighten the two captive screws using a 2 Phillips screwdriver A AK note Tighten the screws of this module before you insert additional modules Otherwise you might unseat modules that you have not secured Store the module packaging for future use 7 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Verifying the SMMi Module Installation After you install the SMMi module verify that it is working correctly by checking the LEDs on the front panel of the SMMi module If it is operati
55. One SMMi slot e One or two power supplies accessed from the front of the unit e One fan tray accessed from the front of the unit Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 115 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector The Alpine 3808 switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of port configurations e 256 switched 10OBASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet ports e 192 switched 100BASE FX Fast Ethernet ports e 32 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports e 128 switched 1000BASE X oversubscribed ports e 128 switched 10 100 1000BASE T oversubscribed ports e 32 switched T1 ports e 32 switched E1 ports e 48 switched Ethernet over VDSL ports e 8 switched T3 ports Figure 46 shows the Alpine 3808 chassis installed with one required SMMi and eight optional I O modules Figure 46 Front view of the Alpine 3808 switch with sample I O modules installed fe fe Blank for z second power supply o LS U 0
56. Rear view of the Alpine 3804 switch Label O re O O PSU 000 oco a i WHEN INSTALLED IN 3804 THIS WAY UP D v Ce my O O a 3 dN AVM SIHL 808 NI GATIVLSNI NIHM ZLosy 30035 o ns O J J SRO LNA The rear view of the Alpine 3804 switch provides Access to the power supply Access to the grounding studs The chassis serial number The Ethernet MAC address of the switch Symbols of safety certification Alpine 3802 Switch Front View The Alpine 3802 switch consists of the following components The Alpine 3802 switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of port One 3 slot chassis with backplane One integrated management module Three I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 3 One or two preinstalled power supplies One fan tray One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector Six light emitting diode LED displays configurations e 64 switched 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet ports e 48 switched 100BASE FX Fast Ethernet ports Alpine 3800 Series Architecture studs power supply Power supply 38_rear4 Grounding Blank for second Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 119 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis e 8 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports e 16 switched 1000BASE X oversub
57. SS p lt 38_fanx4 4 Allow the fan blades to stop spinning before you remove the fan tray from its slot a A WARNING Keep your hands away from rotating fan blades 5 To support the fan tray place one hand under the fan tray and use the other hand to pull the fan tray from its slot 6 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Installing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 fan trays are hot swappable You do not need to turn off power to an Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 switch to install a fan tray You need the following tools and equipment to install a fan tray e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement fan tray A CAUTION Only trained service personnel should perform service to Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 fan trays Before installing or removing any components or carrying out any maintenance procedures see Appendix A To install the fan tray in the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 switch 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 Check the connectors for dust and packing materials 186 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray 3 To support the fan
58. Summit Switch Models A NOTE When configuring the Summit 200 48 switch all ports specified as mirrored ports and mirroring port or ACL ingress ports and egress port must belong to the same port group Port group 1 consists of ports 1 through 24 and port 49 port group 2 consists of ports 25 through 48 and port 50 LEDs The Summit 200 48 switch has the following LEDs e Management e Fan e Port status e Media Selection Fiber For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summit 200 48 switch see Summit 200 48 Switch LEDs on page 91 for more details Software Requirements The Summit 200 48 switch requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 2e 2 or later and S200BootROM 1 5 or later on your switch Summit 200 48 Switch Rear View Figure 36 shows the rear view of the Summit 200 48 switch Figure 36 Summit 200 48 switch rear view Power socket LC48002 Power Socket The Summit 200 48 switch automatically adjusts to the supply voltage The power supply operates down to 90 V Label The label on the rear of the Summit 200 48 switch displays important information about your switch Write down the following information before you install the switch e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device 90 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit 200 48 Switch
59. Switch Rear View 117 Alpine 3804 Switch Front View 117 Alpine 3804 Switch Rear View 119 Alpine 3802 Switch Front View 119 Alpine 3802 Switch Rear View 122 Installing the Chassis 124 Rack Installation 125 Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis 127 Removing the Chassis 128 Chapter 8 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies Power Supply LEDs 130 Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply 131 Verifying a Successful Installation 133 Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply 133 Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 AC Power Supply 134 Verifying a Successful Installation 135 Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply 135 Selecting the Cabling 136 Installing the Power Supply 136 Attaching the Cabling and Supplying Power 139 Verifying a Successful Installation 140 Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply 140 Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 DC Power Supply 141 Selecting the Cabling 142 Attaching the Cabling and Supplying Power 142 Verifying a Successful Installation 143 Chapter9 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module SMMi Memory 146 SMMi LEDs 146 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 7 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Part 5 Chapter 12 Installing SMMi Modules Verifying the SMMi Module Installation Removing SMMi Modules Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules Configuring I O Modules GM 4Ti Module GM 4Xi Module GM 4Si Module GM
60. The UTP GBIC is supported on i series products only Long Range GBIC System Budgets Measure cable plant losses with a 1550 nm light source and verify this to be within budget When calculating the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer for example 0 25 db km Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable splices connectors and operating margin Figure 2 shows the total optical system budget between long range GBICs A NOTE The fiber loss budget plus all other penalties must not exceed the total optical system budget Figure 2 Total optical system budgets for long range GBICs 19 5 dB ZX GBIC 21 0 dB ZX GBIC auaa E a aa ZX GBIC ZX GBIC eros Rev 03 Lx70 eg 22008 xz Lx100 ae 30 008 e Lx100 23 0 dB 29 0 dB _ lt a 2x GBIC J_ lt j a UeE bag ee OS N a 18 0 dB 25 0 dB a ca ZX GBIC Ar LX70 ZX GBIC ea Ra LX100 rE 19 0 dB 27 0 dB eae h 190dB 5x GBic zxq pic l S o 21 5 dB Rev 03 Rev 03 24 0 dB Lg eSB qe XM_041 The ZX mini GBIC is equivalent to the ZX Rev 03 GBIC 28 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support Table 15 lists the minimum attenuations that are required by each long range GBIC to prevent saturation of the receiver Table 15 Minimum attenu
61. WDMi Module GM 16X3 Module GM 16T Module FM 24Ti Module FM 24SFi Module FM 24MFi Module FM 32Ti Module FM 32Pi Module FM 8Vi Module WM 4T1i Module WM 4E1i Module WM 1T3i Module I O Module LEDs Installing I O Modules Verifying the I O Module Installation LED Indicators Displaying Slot Status Information Removing I O Modules Alpine 3800 Series Switch Fan Tray Alpine 3808 Fan Tray Alpine 3804 Fan Tray Alpine 3802 Fan Tray Removing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray Installing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray BlackDiamond Switch 147 148 148 151 153 154 157 158 160 162 164 166 168 170 171 173 175 176 177 177 180 181 181 181 182 183 184 184 185 186 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Overview Summary of Features Port Connections 191 192 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Switch Components 193 BlackDiamond 6816 Switch 193 BlackDiamond 6808 Switch 194 BlackDiamond 6804 Switch 194 BlackDiamond Power Supplies 194 Switch Connectivity and the Backplane 194 Packet Switching and Routing 195 Following Safety Information 195 Chapter 13 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis BlackDiamond 6800 Series Architecture 197 BlackDiamond 6816 Switch Front View 197 BlackDiamond 6816 Switch Rear View 199 BlackDiamond 6808 Switch Front View 200 BlackDiamond 6808 Switch Rear View 202 BlackDiamond 6804 Switch Front View 203 BlackDiamond 6804 Switch Rear View
62. along the side of the module Alpine Access I O modules have a silver stripe along the side of the module When the Alpine 3800 series switch is powered on ExtremeWare generates a default configuration for any slots with I O modules The default configuration allows the I O module ports to participate in the VLAN named default The default configuration for the I O module is not preserved unless you explicitly save the information to nonvolatile RAM NVRAM Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 151 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules You can configure parameters of the I O module after it is installed or you can pre configure a slot for a certain type of module and configuration The pre configured information is applied to the module after it is inserted If you pre configure a slot for a specific module type and then insert a different type of module the module reverts to its default configuration A NOTE See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide for more information about configuring I O modules 152 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules GM 4Ti Module Figure 68 shows the GM 4Ti module Figure 68 GM 4Ti module Module status Port speed LEDs 100 1000 Mbps ports LED 5 3 engr Ose A OO it J Port status LEDs 38_
63. always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install an additional power supply repeat steps 1 through 7 138 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply Attaching the Cabling and Supplying Power After you install the power supply into the chassis you need to attach the cabling so you can supply power to chassis To attach the cable to the lugs and then to the DC power supply perform the following steps 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 Remove the plexiglas cover that shields the power connection on the power supply Strip 0 5 inches of insulation from the appropriate AWG high strand count copper cable 4 Insert the cable into the DC ground and power cable lugs on the power supply as shown in Figure 62 and Figure 63 Figure 62 Alpine 3808 DC power supply with cables NI NAHM SMM 45014 Figure 63 Alpine 3804 DC power supply with cables WHEN IN 440 NO aAOWSY o1gans x Moro 38_lugs4 AR CAUTION Ensure that no copper is visible between the lug and the cable insulation Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 139 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies 5 Tighten the cable retention scre
64. and 6808 chassis Cross module trunking is the ability for a load share group to span multiple modules Load sharing groups are still limited to a maximum of eight ports but the ports can be located on any number of different modules For more information about cross module trunking see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide The MSMs consist of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch The module carrier also includes ejector injector levers and captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel Each MSM has the following ports e Console port Used to connect a terminal and perform local management e Management port Used to connect an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the management port to view and locally manage the switch configurations e Modem port Used to connect a modem for remote access to the CLI e PCMCIA slot Reserved for future use See Chapter 1 Summary of Common Switch Features for more information about management ports and for more information about BlackDiamond MSM module specifications see Appendix C Module Technical Specifications MSM Activity The BlackDiamond 6800 series switch can run with a single MSM installed When you install additional MSMs one of the MSMs operates as the master and the others become the slaves The master MSM is responsible for upper layer protocol processing and
65. are unpopulated receptacles for mini SFP GBICs using optical fibers with LC connectors The Summit 200 24 switch supports the use of 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 1000BASE ZX mini GBICs A NOTE Only mini GBICs that have been certified by Extreme Networks available from Extreme Networks should be inserted into the mini GBIC receptacles on the Summit 200 series switch Only two of the four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports can be active at one time For example you can use both 1000BASE T ports both mini GBIC ports or a combination of one 1000BASE T port and one mini GBIC A NOTE For information on the mini GBIC see Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support on page 20 LEDs The Summit 200 24 switch has the following LEDs e Management e Fan e Port status e Media Selection Fiber 86 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit 200 24 Switch Rear View e Unit Stacking ID Number For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summit 200 24 switch see Summit 200 24 Switch LEDs on page 87 for more details Software Requirements The Summit 200 24 switch requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 2e 2 or later and S200BootROM 1 5 or later on your switch Summit 200 24 Switch Rear View Figure 34 shows the rear view of the Summit 200 24 switch Figure 34 Summit 200 24 switch rear view Power socket LC24002 Power Socket The Summit 200 24
66. cycle once per second Far end fault has been detected Physical link is present but no higher layer link port is misconfigured or disabled Physical link is present higher layer link is established but no traffic is present Physical link is present higher layer link is established and traffic is present Loopback testing mode is in progress Port is active but disabled No link is present Link is present Traffic is present 178 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Table 58 Alpine FM32 Pi I O module LEDs LED Color Indicates Status Green Normal operation Amber No power has been applied INT Power Green 48V power is being supplied from the internal power supply EXT Power Green 48V power is being supplied from an external power supply Configuring I O Modules Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 179 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules Installing I O Modules You can insert I O modules at any time without causing disruption of network services You need the following tools and equipment to install an I O module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e I O module e Appropriate type of cable for the I O module you plan to install To install an I O module 1 Select a slot for the module e Slots numbered 1 through 8 in the Alpine 3808 chassis e Slots numbered 1 through 4 in the Alpine 3804 chassis e Slots numbered 1 through 3 in the Alpine 3802 chassis A CAUTIO
67. e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in autonegotiation mode Table 44 describes the optical specifications for the GM 4Si module Table 44 GM 4Si module optical specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 9 5 dBm 4 dBm Center wavelength 830 nm 850 nm 860 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 17 dBm Optical input power maximum 0 dBm Operating wavelength 830 nm 860 nm LEDs The GM 4Si module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the GM 4Si module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 157 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules GM WDMi Module Figure 71 shows the GM WDMi module Figure 71 GM WDMi module Port status LEDs 4 Gbps port Module status LEDs 38_GMWDM The GM WDMi module has one 4 Gbps port which supports four full duplex Gigabit Ethernet channels The port transmits over a single mode fiber cable using wavelength division multiplexing The port uses an SC APC simplex connector with a spring loaded safety cover APC connectors are polished at an 8 angle to minimize loss and reflections over extended transmit distances The default configuration of the GM WDMi module is as follows The port
68. horizontal as shown in Figure 113 with the e Module name to the left e PCB on top e Ejector injector levers extended Figure 113 MSM prior to insertion in a BlackDiamond 6816 or a BlackDiamond 6804 MSMG4 a a z 4 fe ep C i ye m zi pA SED 1 a Cea nr D Ac J For the BlackDiamond 6808 ensure that the MSM is vertical as shown in Figure 114 with the e Module name at the top e PCB to the right e Fjector injector levers are extended 232 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing MSMs Figure 114 MSM prior to insertion in a BlackDiamond 6808 MSMG64 50015 ALLL a A CONSOLE 2 35 BP MODEM FORGE UNK ACTNITY Sa fat E i SEES Ga 2 EW _clips Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 233 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module a Slide the MSM into the appropriate lettered slot of the chassis until it makes contact with the backplane A NOTE Use the metal panel not the PCB to guide the MSM As the MSM begins to seat in the chassis the ejector injector levers begin to close b To close the ejector injector levers use both hands simultaneously to push the handles toward the center of the module c To secure the module tighten the two screws with a 1 Phillips screwdriver A AK note Tighten the screws of this module before you insert additional m
69. left to cover the power connector AR CAUTION Ensure that the latch covers the AC power connector The power supply cannot be removed unless the connector is covered 4 Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the screw on the ejector injector lever then pull the ejector injector lever towards you to disengage the power supply connectors from the backplane Hold on to the central handle to steady the power supply AR CAUTION When you remove a power supply use one hand to support the power supply from the bottom and the other hand to hold the central handle on the front of the power supply Do not use just the ejector injector lever to remove a power supply 5 Use one hand on the central handle to slowly pull the power supply towards you Place your other hand beneath the power supply to support it as you pull it out of the chassis 6 If you are going to install a replacement power supply follow the installation steps on page 131 7 If there is a problem with the power supply that you removed contact Extreme Networks for assistance Do not attempt to fix a faulty power supply Personal injury to yourself or others may occur 8 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 AC Power Supply The Alpine 3802 switch supports up to two AC power supplies that come preinstalled from the factory A NOTE
70. lt cost gt 1g lt cost gt 10g lt cost gt Where lt cost gt specifies the interface cost The default cost settings for each interface are e 10 Mbps 10 e 100 Mbps 5 e 1 Gbps 4 e 10 Gbps 2 250 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules The following example configures the automatic interface costs for 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1 Gbps and 10 Gbps interfaces config ospf metric table 10m 20 100m 10 1g 8 10g 4 For more information about this and other ExtremeWare commands see the ExtremeWare Software Command Reference Guide Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 251 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules F48Ti Module Figure 122 shows the F48Ti module Figure 122 F48Ti module Module status LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports with status LEDs oon One a 4 ol o d ol cael E lt H I 4 M ET fal IB ca Eh oa ol d lt A A d a b H eT d oa E lt H IB 4 oa ol d oa an BI D O The F48Ti has 48 autosensing 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports All ports use standard RJ 45 connectors The default configuration of the F48Ti module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in auto negotiation mode LEDs The F48Ti module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity
71. mounting Alpine 3802 chassis Alpine 3804 chassis Alpine 3808 chassis BlackDiamond 6804 chassis BlackDiamond 6808 chassis BlackDiamond 6816 chassis Summit switch radio frequency interference avoiding related publications removing GBIC mini GBIC 133 140 223 97 power cable from the AC power cable retaining bracket Summit switch reset button Summitli switch Summit48i switch Summit48si switch Summit5i switch Summit7i switch RJ 21 connector pinouts port RJ 45 cable connector jackets running cable S bend radius fiber optic UTP cable distances fiber optic cable slack safety information saving configuration MSM securing the rack serial number Alpine 3802 switch Alpine 3804 switch Alpine 3808 switch BlackDiamond 6804 switch BlackDiamond 6808 BlackDiamond 6816 switch Summit 200 24 switch Summitli switch Summit48i switch 100 Summit48si switch Summit5i switch Summit71 switch serial port See console port service access to the rack site planning process slave MSM installing SMMi module console port description dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard hot swapping installing LEDs management port memory removing telecommunications standard tools installation tools removal verifying the installation weight socket power Alpine 3802 switch Summit 200 24 switch Summitli switch Summit48i switch Summit48si switch Summit5i switch Su
72. page 177 170 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules FM 32Pi Module Figure 79 shows the FM 32Pi module Figure 79 FM 32Pi module LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports TERE TETE L L LJA a EWUG001 The FM 32Pi module has 32 powered 10 100 Mpbs autonegotiating Ethernet ports using standard RJ 45 connectors The FM 32Pi module supports autonegotitation of 10BASE T and 100BASE TX The FM32Pi module supports powered ports according to IEFE 802 3AF and is suitable for use in intra building applications The 48 VDC supplied to the powered ports is generated from the 3 3V supply on the backplane which eliminates the need for external cables or power modules A connector provided on the front panel shown inFigure 80 allows more ports to be powered by attaching a cable to an external 48 volt power supply Figure 80 Auxiliary power connector Connector N hth O INT POWER O O S B EXT POWER O 7 20 21 10417 2 18 3 19 420 sauso EWUG002 a a The total power available from the ports on the FM 32Pi module is 32 watts This will provide 2 ports at full power 15 4W class 3 4 ports at medium power 7 0W class 2 or 8 ports at low power 4 0W class1 There is no limitation to the number of modules installed but ExtremeWare will enforce a limit on the number of ports powered up per blade and per system The defa
73. part number 50012 will not support a chassis fully populated with G24T3 modules Table 74 lists the number of G24T3 modules that you can install in a BlackDiamond chassis depending on which power supplies are installed Table 74 G24T3 modules supported Chassis Power Supply G24T Module BlackDiamond 6804 any 4 BlackDiamond 6808 original power supplies 5 BlackDiamond 6808 iPower power supplies 7 BlackDiamond 6816 iPower power supplies 15 246 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules WDMi Module Figure 120 shows the WDMi module Figure 120 WDMi module 51034 Module status LEDs BI 10 000 Mbps port Channel status LEDs O BD_WDMi The WDMi module has one 10 Gbps port which supports eight full duplex Gigabit Ethernet channels The port transmits over a pair of single mode fiber cables using wavelength division multiplexing The port uses an SC APC duplex connector with a spring loaded safety cover APC connectors are polished at an 8 angle to minimize loss and reflections over extended transmit distances The default configuration of the WDMi module is as follows The port e Is added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherits the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth The WDMi module transmits bi directionally on both fiber cables and then multiplexes t
74. power supply for the Alpine 3804 switch Ejector Safety On off injector latch switch Handle lever Psu wa scox WHEN INSTALLED IN 3804 THIS WAY UP eo ep A E a P dN AYM SIHL 808 NI GATIVLSNI NIHM a ozonas Q O zz0Sp 38_DCPS4 acu CAUTION When you insert a power supply use one hand to support the power supply from the bottom and the other hand to hold the central handle on the front of the power supply Do not use just the ejector injector lever to insert a power supply 4 Use the central handle to guide the power supply into the bay while supporting the supply from the bottom with your other hand AM CAUTION Do not slam the power supply into the backplane This or other excessive force will cause damage and possibly require the return of the chassis 5 Place both hands on each side of the power supply to slowly and evenly slide the power supply into the bay During the last inch of insertion into the chassis place one hand on the central handle to steady the power supply and use your other hand to gently push the ejector injector lever towards the power supply to engage the power supply backplane connectors 6 Secure the power supply by tightening the screw on the ejector injector lever using a 2 Phillips screwdriver 7 Slide the locking safety latch away from the remove position Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is
75. requires 4 screws to be securely mounted in a rack A Helper bracket 3802rack 6 After you secure the chassis remove the helper bracket Store it for future use for example if you need to remove the chassis Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis To ground your Alpine 3800 series chassis in accordance with NEBS standards gather these materials e Two zinc plated steel lockwashers e Two zinc plated steel nuts e One Panduit style standard two hole barrel copper compression lug e AWG high strand count copper wire cable appropriate for your chassis 8 AWG for the Alpine 3808 10 AWG for the Alpine 3804 14 AWG for the Alpine 3802 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 127 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis To ground the chassis 1 Strip 0 5 inch 1 2 cm of insulation from the appropriate AWG high strand count copper wire cable 2 Insert the cable into the cable lug A CAUTION Ensure that no copper is visible between the lug and the cable insulation Tighten the cable retention screw using a or 5 flathead screwdriver to 20 in lbs of torque Attach the ground lug lock washers and nuts in that order to the grounding studs on the rear of the chassis Tighten the nuts to 125 in lbs of torque Removing the Chassis This section describes how to remove the Alpine 3800 series chassis f
76. screws 3 Simultaneously rotate the ejector injector levers away from the center of the module to disengage the module from the backplane a Grasp the module front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the metal panel to support the module A CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors b Slide the module out of the chassis and place it immediately into an antistatic sack to protect it from ESD damage and to prevent dust from collecting on the module s connectors 4 If you are not going to install a replacement I O module cover the slot with a blank faceplate Otherwise follow the I O module installation procedure on page 180 5 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To remove additional modules repeat steps 1 through 4 182 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3800 Series Switch Fan Tray This chapter describes e Alpine 3808 Fan Tray on page 183 e Alpine 3804 Fan Tray on page 184 e Alpine 3802 Fan Tray on page 184 e Removing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray on page 185 e Installing the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 Fan Tray on page 186 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any Alpine fan tray Alpine 3808
77. sensitivity 23 dBm Optical input power maximum 3 dBm Operating wavelength 1270 nm 1355 nm General Total system budget 13 5 dB Total optical system budget for the LX mini GBIC is 13 5 dB Measure cable plant losses with a 1310 nm light source and verify this to be within budget When calculating the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer for example 0 25 dB km Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dBm of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable splices connectors and operating margin Thus 10 5 dB remains available for cable induced attenuation There is no minimum system budget or minimum cable length restriction because the maximum receive power is the same as the maximum transmit power There is no minimum attenuation or minimum cable length restriction Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 21 Summary of Common Switch Features Table 6 ZX mini GBIC specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 2 dBm 0 dBm 3 dBm Center wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 23 dBm Optical input power maximum 3 dBm Operating wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm The ZX mini GBIC is compatible with and interoperates with long range GBICs For more information about the budget requirements and minimum attenutation requirements of long range GBICs see Long Range GBIC System Budgets on page 28
78. terminals that are centered 0 625 inch 15 86 mm apart e For convenience the lock washers and nuts that you use to connect the source DC cables to the power terminals are loosely mounted on the studs of the DC power supply A NOTE Add a length of heat shrink tubing to prevent the crimp area on the lug from coming into contact with the metal faceplate of the DC power supply Figure 106 shows the specifications of the lug that is used to connect the DC power cable to the DC power supply Figure 106 Dimensions of the DC power cable lugs lt 2 25 in 5 72cm gt __ 4 AWG high strand count Terminal crimp conductor t 2 holes 0 55 in 0 678cm lt 0 625 in gt lt Area for __ gt 1 heat shrink 0 08 in ine eee ig ain tubing 0 20cm 0 64cm 0 94cm Use power cables and lugs with the specifications outlined in Table 66 Table 66 Source DC power specifications Characteristic Specification DC power cable size 4 AWG high strand count copper wire DC power cable lug Panduit copper standard barrel 2 hole lug Type LDC Panduit part number LCD4 14A L Thomas amp Betts part number LCN4 14 Power 1800 W 42 to 70 VDC Attaching the DC Cabling To attach the cable to the lugs perform the following steps 1 Strip 0 5 inches of insulation from the 4 AWG high strand count copper wire cable 2 Insert the cable into
79. that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel Check the connectors for dust and packing materials Ensure that the fan tray is right side up 4 For the BlackDiamond 6816 switch and the BlackDiamond 6804 switch support the fan tray with one hand under the fan tray and use the other hand to guide the fan tray into the slot Gently begin to insert the new fan tray into the slot For the BlackDiamond 6808 switch use both hands to hold the fan tray handles and use the two pins located on each side of the fan tray to guide the fan tray into the bay Gently begin to insert the new fan tray into the bay A NOTE If the chassis is powered on the fan blades will begin turning as soon as the tray makes contact with the backplane 5 Secure the fan tray For the BlackDiamond 6816 switch and the BlackDiamond 6804 switch turn the screws clockwise until they become tight For the BlackDiamond 6808 switch use the screws that you saved earlier and turn the screws clockwise until they become tight 6 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 285 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Fan Tray 286 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A Part 6 switch Operation Initial Switch and Management Access This chapter describes e Connecting Equipment to the Consol
80. that participate with the Extreme support expanded functionality features and flexibility chipset to The GPP subsystem handles system control and I O module management functions The GPP subsystem resides outside of the I O module data path to optimize performance ATM Module LED Indicators The ATM module is equipped with two module level LED indicators STATUS and DIAG and one port level LED indicator for each network interface port on the ATM module see Figure 135 e STATUS LED Located near the top end of the ATM module front panel near the ejector injector lever This LED indicator is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals the operating status of the module as a whole e DIAG LED Located beside the STATUS LED This LED is a single color LED displaying in amber only that flashes amber when diagnostics are running on the module and is solid amber if the module fails the diagnostics e Port level LED Located next to the port number identifying each fiber optic network interface connector on the front panel of the module The port LED is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals the operating status of that network interface port Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 269 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules A NOTE During the ATM module boot up the Status and Diag LEDs may be incorrectly lit to solid green or solid amber The LEDs reflect their true state a
81. the cable lugs AM CAUTION Ensure that no copper is visible between the lug and the cable insulation 222 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply 3 Tighten the cable retention screw using a or 5 flathead screwdriver to 20 in lbs of torque The cable retention screw is shown in Figure 107 Figure 107 2 stud lug Cable retention screw DC_lug Each set of power terminals on the DC power supply consists of two 6 mm metric threaded nickel plated brass studs centered 0 625 inch apart The earth ground studs extend 0 52 inch 13 2 mm above the power supply faceplate the set of positive and negative studs extend 0 9 inch 22 9 mm above the faceplate The nickel plating on the studs enhances conductivity and resists corrosion For convenience the lock washers and nuts for connecting the source DC cables to the power terminals are loosely mounted on the studs ready for use Verifying a Successful Installation After you supply power to the BlackDiamond switch each MSM performs a POST of its circuitry The LED labeled SYS on the MSM blinks amber during the POST After the MSM has passed its POST and is operational each I O module performs its own POST A NOTE See Chapter 15 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module for more information about switch management module LED activity and Chapter 16 BlackDiamond 68
82. to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons e Some devices such as GBICs contain fiber optic ports To protect your eyes you should never look at the fiber optic ports while they are on or look directly at the fiber cable ends when they are on Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 63 Summit Switch Overview 64 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit Switch Models This chapter describes Front and rear views of the Summit switch models LEDs on the Summit switch models Switch Models The following models comprise the Summit family of switches Summitli on page 66 Summit5i on page 69 Summit7i on page 73 Summit48i on page 78 Summit48si on page 81 Summit 200 24 on page 85 Summit 200 48 on page 89 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 65 Summit Switch Models Summit1i Switch Front View As shown in Figure 15 and Figure 16 the Summitli switch is 2U in height and is available in two port configurations e Six autosensing 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports with RJ 45 connectors and two 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors e Six 1000BASE SX ports with MT RJ connectors and two 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors Figure 15 Front view of the Summit1i switch with 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports 100 1000 Mbps ports Unit status LEDs 000BASE X
83. 0 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 318 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond Modules BlackDiamond Modules Table 103 MSM specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 6 25 lbs 2 81 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH
84. 0 Series Fan Tray Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray Switch Operation Initial Switch and Management Access Connecting Equipment to the Console Port Logging In for the First Time Appendixes 237 238 239 241 242 245 247 249 252 253 257 258 262 265 268 272 273 274 274 275 275 276 279 280 281 282 284 289 291 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Appendix A Safety Information Important Safety Information Power Power Cable Fuse Connections Lithium Battery Appendix B Switch Technical Specifications Appendix C Module Technical Specifications Alpine Modules BlackDiamond Modules Common Module Specifications Index 295 295 296 296 297 297 310 319 331 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Preface This preface provides an overview of this guide describes guide conventions and lists other publications that might be useful A NOTE To ensure proper operation of your Extreme Networks equipment read this guide before you install any Extreme Networks equipment Introduction This guide provides the required information to install an Extreme Networks Summit switch Alpine switch or BlackDiamond switch It also contains information about site location switch functionality and switch operation This guide is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible f
85. 0 Series Switch Chassis A NOTE To ensure the system meets the NEBS GR 63 CORE Zone 4 earthquake requirements we recommend the use of a welded steel seismic rack such as Hendry Telephone Products www hendry com model 0GS136 Grounding the BlackDiamond 6800 Series Chassis To ground your BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis in accordance with NEBS standards gather these materials e Two 1 4 20 steel zinc plate screw fasteners approximately 1 2 in length e Two zinc plated steel lockwashers e One Panduit style standard two hole barrel copper compression lug e 4 AWG high strand count copper wire cable To ground the chassis 1 Strip 0 5 inch 1 2 cm of insulation from the 4 AWG high strand count copper wire cable 2 Insert the cable into the cable lug A CAUTION Ensure that no copper is visible between the lug and the cable insulation 3 Tighten the cable retention screw using a or 5 4 flathead screwdriver to 20 in lbs of torque 4 Attach the ground lug lock washers and screw fasteners in that order to the grounding studs on the rear of the chassis Use cables and lugs with the specifications outlined in Table 61 Table 61 Cable and lug specifications Characteristic Specification Cable size 4 AWG high strand count copper wire Lug Panduit copper standard barrel 2 hole lug Type LDC Panduit part number LCD4 14A L Thomas amp Betts part number LCN4 14 Power 1971 W 42 to 72 VDC R
86. 00 Series I O Modules for more information about I O module LED activity Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply BlackDiamond 6800 series power supplies are hot swappable You can add or remove power supplies without turning off power to the chassis and normal operation will continue as long as the switch has enough power to support the installed modules If you have three or more power supplies installed in a BlackDiamond 6818 or two or more power supplies installed in a BlackDiamond 6808 or BlackDiamond 6804 you can remove one of them without turning off power to the chassis You need the following tools and equipment to remove the BlackDiamond 6800 series power supplies e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement power supply Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 223 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies To remove a 110 VAC 220 VAC or 48 VDC power supply 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel Completely remove the power supply cable s from the wall outlet and then from the power supply If you have a DC power supply turn the on off switch to the off position and remove the power cables Unscrew the power supply using a 1 Phillips screwdriver On a BlackDiamond 6816 disengage the power supply by rotating the handle out and
87. 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber a 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters A NOTE For more information about the supported GBIC types see GBIC Specifications on page 25 LEDs Both Summit7i models have the following LEDs e Unit status e Management e Port status e Port speed e Management port For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summit7i switch see Summitli Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i Switch LEDs on page 77 Reset Button Use the reset button to cycle the switch down and bring the switch back up without powering off the switch Your saved switch configuration information is not lost unsaved switch configurations are lost Use a non conductive tool to push the reset button Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector to attach a terminal and access the CLI via a serial connection Use the console port for local management Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 75 Summit Switch Models Modem Port Use the modem port to connect a modem for remote access to the command line interface CLI Management Port Us
88. 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 322 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond Modules Table 107 10GLRi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 6 25 lbs 2 81 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 Table 108 describes the immunity standards for the 1OGLRi module Table 108 Immunity standards for the 10GLRi module Performance Test Specification Cri
89. 11 GM 4Si module 311 BlackDiamond 6804 switch 194 GM 4Ti module 311 BlackDiamond 6808 switch 194 GM 4Xi module 311 BlackDiamond 6816 switch 193 GM WDMi module 313 configuring IP settings 291 MPLS module 329 connectors MSM 319 diagnostic service ports PoS module 327 ARM module 263 SMMi module 310 ATM module 270 Summit i series switch 299 MPLS module 266 Summit 200 series switch 302 PoS module 260 WDMi module 322 console port WM 1T3i module 318 location Summit 200 24 switch 86 WM 4E1i module 317 location Summit 200 48 switch 89 WM 4T1i module 317 location Summitli switch 68 DIMMs location Summit48i switch 80 description Alpine 146 location Summit48si switch 82 description BlackDiamond 230 location Summit5i switch 71 distribution rack requirements location Summit7i switch 74 grounding the rack 46 MSM 229 mechanical recommendations 45 settings 289 securing the rack 46 SMMi 146 service access 46 conventions space requirements 46 notice icons 14 text 14 E electrical codes 37 D electromagnetic compatibility DC cabling 10GLRi module 323 Alpine 3802 switch Alpine 3800 series switch 304 attaching 142 ARM module 328 selecting 142 ATM module 330 Alpine 3804 switch BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 306 attaching 139 F32Fi module 326 selecting 104 136 F48Ti module 325 Alpine 3808 switch F96Ti module 325 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 335 FM 24MFi module FM 24SFi module FM 24Ti module FM 32Ti module FM 8Vi module G1
90. 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 310 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine Modules Table 95 GM 4Ti GM 4Xi and GM 4Si module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 4 lbs 1 8 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Cla
91. 2 3z standard Use only Extreme Networks certified mini GBICs available from Extreme Networks into the mini GBIC port in the switch or module 20 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support Table 4 describes the specifications for the SX mini GBIC interface Table 5 describes the specifications for the LX mini GBIC interface and Table 6 describes the specifications for the ZX mini GBIC interface Table 4 SX mini GBIC specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 9 5 dBm 4 dBm Center wavelength 830 nm 850 nm 860 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 21 dBm Optical input power maximum 4 dBm Operating wavelength 830 nm 860 nm General Total system budget 11 5 dB Total optical system budget for the SX mini GBIC is 11 5 dB Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable splices connectors and operating margin While 8 5 dB remains available for cable induced attenuation the 1000BASE SX standard specifies supported distances of 275 meters over 62 5 micron multimode fiber and 550 meters over 50 micron multimode fiber There is no minimum attenuation or minimum cable length restriction Table 5 LX mini GBIC specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 9 5 dBm 3 dBm Center wavelength 1275 nm 1310 nm 1355 nm Receiver Optical input power
92. 20 3 cm Weight 5 lbs 2 7 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 316 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine Modules Table 101 WM 4T1i and WM 4E1i module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 5 Ibs 2 7 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed ac
93. 205 Installing the Chassis 205 Rack Installation 206 Grounding the BlackDiamond 6800 Series Chassis 210 Removing the Chassis 210 Chapter 14 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies 220 VAC Power Supplies 214 110 VAC Power Supplies 215 DC Power Supplies 216 Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply 217 AC Power Cable and Plug 221 Selecting the DC Cabling 221 Preparing the DC Cabling 222 Attaching the DC Cabling 222 Verifying a Successful Installation 223 Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply 223 Chapter 15 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module MSM Activity 229 MSM Memory 230 MSM LEDs 231 Installing MSMs 231 Verifying the MSM Module Installation 234 Removing MSMs 235 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 9 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Part 6 Chapter 18 Part 7 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Configuring I O Modules G8Ti Module G8Xi Module G12SXi Module G16X3 Module G24T3 Module WDMi Module 10GLRi Module F48Ti Module F96Ti Module F32Fi Module P3cSi P3cMi P12cSi and P12cMi Modules ARM MPLS Module A3cSi and A3cMi Modules I O Module LEDs Installing I O Modules Verifying the I O Module Installation LED Indicators Displaying Slot Status Information Removing I O Modules Installing XENPAK Modules BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Fan Tray BlackDiamond 6816 Fan Trays BlackDiamond 6808 Fan Tray BlackDiamond 6804 Fan Tray Removing a BlackDiamond 680
94. 22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Heat Dissipation Summitti SX 105 W maximum 358 BTU hr maximum TX 187 W maximum 638 BTU hr maximum Summit5i SX 200 W maximum 683 BTU hr maximum TX 345 W maximum 1177 BTU hr maximum LX 200 W maximum 683 BTU hr maximum Summit7i SX 372 W maximum 1270 BTU hr maximum TX 698 W maximum 2382 BTU hr maximum Summit48i 140 W maximum 477 BTU hr maximum Summit48si 185 W maximum 631 BTU hr maximum Power Supplies Summitti AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Summit5i AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Summit7i AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options 50 Hz to 60 Hz 85 VAC to 250 VAC 100 120 200 240 VAC 3 1 5 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz 100 VAC to 240 VAC 100 120 200 240 VAC 4 2 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz 90 VAC to 264 VAC 300 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Current Rating Summit48i AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Summit48si AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating 100 120 200 240 VAC 10 5 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz 85 VAC to 250 VAC 100 120 200 240 VAC 3 1 5 A 50 Hz to 60 Hz auto ranging 100 VAC to 240 VAC 100 120 200 240 VAC 3 1 5A Switch Power Off Temperature power off Summ
95. 2SXi module G16X3 module G24T3 module G8Ti module G8Xi module GM 16T3 module GM 16X3 module GM 4Si module GM 4Ti module GM 4Xi module GM WDMi module MPLS module MSM PoS module SMMi module Summit i series switch Summit 200 series switch WDMi module WM 1T3i module WM 4T1i module electrostatic discharge environmental requirements environmental standard 10GLRi module ARM module F32Fi module F48Ti module F96Ti module FM 24MFi module FM 24SFi module FM 24Ti module FM 32Ti module FM 8Vi module G12SXi module G16X3 module G24T3 module G8Ti module G8Xi module GM 16T3 module GM 16X3 module GM 4Si module GM 4Ti module GM 4Xi module GM WDMi module MPLS module MSM PoS module SMMi module WDMi module WM 1T3i module WM 4E1i module WM 4T1i module ESD wrist strap ESD See electrostatic discharge F F32Fi module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility 315 315 314 314 316 320 321 321 320 320 312 312 311 311 311 313 329 319 327 310 300 302 322 318 317 44 49 38 308 323 328 326 325 325 315 315 314 314 316 320 321 321 320 320 312 312 311 311 311 313 329 319 327 310 322 318 317 317 257 326 326 environmental standard telecommunications standard weight F48Ti module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight F96Ti module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications stand
96. 4 E1 WM 1T3i 2 1 T3 1 The GM 4Xi supports 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX and 1000BASE LX70 2 The GM WDMi supports four Gigabit Ethernet channels over single fiber using wavelength division multiplexing 3 The GM 16X supports 1000BASE X 4 The GM 16T supports 10 100 1000BASE T autonegotiation 5 The FM 8Vi has eight internal loopback ports for rate shaping Module supports 10BASE S Switch Components There are three models in the Alpine 3800 series the Alpine 3808 switch the Alpine 3804 switch and the Alpine 3802 switch This section describes the three Alpine models Alpine 3808 Switch The Alpine 3808 switch consists of the following components e One 9 slot chassis with backplane e Eight I O module slots labeled 1 through 8 e One SMMi slot e One or two power supplies accessed from the front of the unit e One fan tray accessed from the front of the unit e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector Alpine 3804 Switch The Alpine 3804 switch consists of the following components e One 5 slot chassis with backplane e Four I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 4 e One SMMi slot e One or two power supplies accessed from the rear of the unit e One fan tray e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 111 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Overview Alpine 3802 Switch The Alpine 3802 switch consists of the following components e One 3 sl
97. 5 20P locking power cable Power supplies slide in from the front of the chassis as illustrated in Figure 98 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 215 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies Figure 98 110 VAC power supplies in a BlackDiamond 6808 or a BlackDiamond 6804 amp 6 BD_026 Table 64 describes the LED activity on the 110 VAC power supply Table 64 110 VAC power supply LED activity LED Color Indicates AC In Green Powered using both inputs Amber Powered using only one input or input voltage is less than 100 V Off No input power DC Out Green All DC outputs are operational Amber One or more DC outputs failed Off No power DC Power Supplies The DC inputs are located on the front of the power supply Each set of power terminals on the DC power supply consists of two 6 mm metric threaded nickel plated brass studs that are centered 0 625 inch 15 86 mm apart The earth ground studs extend 0 52 inch 13 2 mm above the power supply faceplate the set of positive and negative studs extend 0 9 inch 22 9 mm above the faceplate The nickel plating on the studs enhances conductivity and resists corrosion The
98. 6 215 217 130 121 177 273 ATM module 272 BlackDiamond I O modules 272 MPLS module 273 MSM 231 PoS module 272 SMMi 146 Summit i series switch 77 85 Summit 200 24 switch 87 Summit 200 48 switch 91 LX100 GBIC requirements 27 M MAC address 91 Alpine 3802 switch 122 123 Alpine 3804 switch 119 Alpine 3808 switch 117 BlackDiamond 6804 switch 205 BlackDiamond 6808 switch 202 BlackDiamond 6816 switch 199 Summit 200 24 switch 87 Summitli switch 68 Summit48i switch 80 Summit48si switch 85 Summit5i switch 72 Summit7i switch 77 management port 20 MSM 229 SMMi module 146 Summit5i switch 72 Summit7i switch 76 Management Switch Fabric Module See MSM64i module media types and distances 50 memory MSM 230 memory SMMi module 146 mini GBIC 20 installing 24 removing 24 safety 22 specifications LX 21 SX 21 ZX 22 modem port Summit7i switch 76 MPLS module 265 diagnostic service ports 266 dimensions 329 electromagnetic compatibility 329 environmental standard 329 GPP subsystem 265 LEDs 273 network processors 265 telecommunications standard 329 weight 329 MSM booting 230 console port 229 description 194 227 dimensions 319 electromagnetic compatibility 319 environmental standard 319 hot swapping 231 installing 231 338 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide LEDs 231 management port 229 master slave functionality 229 memory 230 ports 229 removing 235 saving configuration 230 telecommunications
99. 6 bottom view 84 Summit48i 78 certification marks 308 Summit48si 81 console port location 82 Summit5i 69 electromagnetic compatibility 300 Summit7i 73 environmental requirements 308 rear view Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 341 Summitli Summit48i Summit48si Summit5i Summit7i Switch Management Module See SMMi module switch on off Alpine 3802 DC switch system budgets long range GBICs T telecommunications standard 10GLRi module Alpine 3800 series switch ARM module ATM module F32Fi module F48Ti module F96Ti module FM 24MFi module FM 24SFi module FM 24Ti module FM 32Ti module FM 8Vi module G12SXi module G8Ti module G8Xi module GM 4Si module GM 4Ti module GM 4Xi module GM WDMi module MPLS module MSM PoS module SMMi module WDMi module WM 1T3i module WM 4E1i module WM 4T1i module temperature tools Alpine 3800 series rack installation Alpine 3800 series rack removal Alpine 3804 AC power supply Alpine 3804 DC power supply 102 Alpine 3804 fan tray installation Alpine 3804 fan tray removal Alpine 3808 AC power supply Alpine 3808 DC power supply 102 Alpine 3808 fan tray installation Alpine 3808 fan tray removal Alpine I O module installation Alpine I O module removal BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis rack installation BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis rack removal BlackDiamond 6800 series power supply BlackDiamond I O module installation MSM installation MSM removal SMM ii installation SMMi removal Summ
100. 6 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 MIC Telecom 306 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Heat Dissipation 220 VAC Power Supply 2544 W maximum 8687 BTU hr maximum 110 VAC Power Supply 2661 W maximum 9088 BTU hr maximum 48 DC Power Supply 2708 W maximum 9246 BTU hr maximum Power Supplies 220 VAC Power Supply AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Weight 110 VAC Power Supply AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating Weight 48 DC Power Supply Input Voltage Options Current Rating Weight 50 Hz to 60 Hz 200 VAC to 240 VAC auto ranging 200 VAC 15 A 33 0 Ibs 15 0 kg 50 Hz to 60 Hz 100 VAC to 240 VAC auto ranging 100 200 VAC 15 7 5A 33 0 Ibs 15 0 kg 42 VDC to 70 VDC auto ranging 48 VDC 60 A 31 75 Ibs 14 4 kg Switch Power Off Temperature power off Original supply not DC and not high output 75 C 167 F DC Supply Stand alone 65 to 70 C 149 to 158 F In chassis 70 C 158 F High output 75 C 167 F Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 307 Switch Technical Specifications Table 93
101. 6804air Humidity Operating humidity should be kept between 10 and 95 relative humidity noncondensing Electrostatic Discharge ESD Your system must be protected from static electricity Take the following measures to ensure optimum system performance e Keep relative humidity at 50 to 70 e Remove materials that can cause electrostatic generation such as synthetic resins from the wiring closet Check the appropriateness of floor mats and flooring e Connect conductors metals etc to ground using dedicated grounding lines e Use electrostatically safe equipment and the ESD straps that are provided with your equipment All Alpine and BlackDiamond switches come with ESD wrist strap connectors and wrist straps as shown in Figure 10 44 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Meeting Site Requirements Figure 10 Ensure that you use an ESD wrist strap when handling switch components Ce 000000 00000 gt SS N gt SS o SS a gt S gt gt SS w gt SS S S a ogee onsanea ESD strap C oe e connector En M Connected wrist strap a m ap Boome a m D Gap 0o 00000 000008 00000 00000 oO Sa S SS SS SSS SS SS SES SSaeasaaon GB aS SS SS SS L S ORSR
102. 8 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia Environmental EN ETSI 300 019 2 1 2000 class 1 2 EN ETSI 300 019 2 2 1999 class 2 3 EN ETSI 300 019 2 2 1999 class 3 1e ASTM D5276 ASTM D3580 ASTM D3332 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 321 Module Technical Specifications Table 106 WDMi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 6 25 lbs 2 81 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR
103. 9 20 44 45 2 6 1 3 11 21 22 46 47 2 6 1 3 12 23 24 48 49 2 6 1 3 Table 80 describes the output signals for the RJ 21 connector Table 80 Output signals for the RJ 21 connector RJ 21 Pin RJ 21 Pin Numbers Output Signal Numbers Output Signal RxD 26 RxD 2 TxD 27 TxD 3 RxD 28 RxD 4 TxD 29 TxD 5 RxD 30 RxD 6 TxD 31 TxD 7 RxD 32 RxD 8 TxD 33 TxD 9 RxD 34 RxD 10 TxD 35 TxD 11 RxD 36 RxD 12 TxD 37 TxD 13 RxD 38 RxD 14 TxD 39 TxD 15 RxD 40 RxD 16 TxD 41 TxD 17 RxD 42 RxD 18 TxD 43 TxD 19 RxD 44 RxD 20 TxD 45 TxD 21 RxD 46 RxD 22 TxD 47 TxD 254 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Table 80 Output signals for the RJ 21 connector continued RJ 21 Pin RJ 21 Pin Numbers Output Signal Numbers Output Signal 23 RxD 48 RxD 24 TxD 49 TxD Table 81 describes the cable specifications for the RJ 21 connector Appropriate cables are available from your local supplier Table 81 F96Ti cable specifications Connectors Cable Min Length Max Length Max Torque Lucent 525 Telco 50 pin RJ 21 Shielded trunk cable with 12 1m 100 m 4 in lbs CAT5 twisted pairs To access the ports use a 180 degree male RJ 21 connector with a shielded PVC trunk cable and secure to a maximum of 4 in lbs of torque You
104. Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules Table 55 RJ 21 connector and wire pairs continued VDSL Ring Side Tip Side Port Pin Number Wire Color Pin number Wire Color 7 7 orange red 32 red orange 8 8 green red 33 red green LEDs The FM 8Vi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the FM 8Vi module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The FM 8Vi module requires that the SMMi has ExtremeWare version 6 1 5 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later For more information about software requirements and module configuration see the ExtremeWare Release Notes Software Version 6 1 5w2 01 Rev1 The FM 8Vi module also requires a connection to the Mogul 100 For more information about Mogul 100 configuration see the Mogul 100 Quick Guide Configuring the FM 8Vi The VDSL connection from the FM 8Vi to the Mogul 100 is automatically established by the hardware on the two devices There are no commands to configure this VDSL connection However the VDSL ports on the FM 8Vi connect to the Mogul 100 in such a way that the Ethernet port on the Mogul 100 behaves as though it is located on the Alpine switch When you configure a port on the FM 8Vi you are configuring the Ethernet port on the Mogul 100 For example when you add port 2 on the FM 8Vi to a VLAN the Ethernet port on the Mogul 100 connected to port 2 of the FM 8Vi now belongs to that VLAN The ports on
105. Alpine 3808 202 306 306 215 214 216 308 229 306 306 308 199 206 199 227 210 199 306 306 306 223 193 195 191 210 307 307 307 237 331 272 192 307 220 307 306 48 120 118 116 334 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6804 204 attaching 139 BlackDiamond 6808 202 selecting 104 136 BlackDiamond 6816 199 BlackDiamond 6800 series switch rear view attaching 104 222 Alpine 3802 AC 122 lugs 216 Alpine 3802 DC 123 preparing 222 Alpine 3804 119 selecting 221 Alpine 3808 117 design standards 55 BlackDiamond 6804 205 dimensions BlackDiamond 6808 203 10GLRi module 323 checking the installation Alpine 3800 series switch 304 Alpine 3802 switch AC 135 ARM module 328 Alpine 3802 switch DC 143 ATM module 330 Alpine 3804 switch AC 133 BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 306 Alpine 3804 switch DC 140 F32Fi module 326 Alpine 3808 switch AC 133 F48Ti module 325 Alpine 3808 switch DC 140 F96Ti module 325 BlackDiamond switch 223 FM 24MFi module 315 Summit switch 97 FM 24SFi module 315 commands FM 24Ti module 314 clear log static 231 FM 32Ti module 314 show memory 62 FM 8Vi module 316 synchronize 234 G12SXi module 320 commands for Alpine 3802 G16X3 module 321 configure switch 120 G24T3 module 321 commercial building standards 55 G8Ti module 320 components G8Xi module 320 Alpine 3802 switch 112 GM 16T3 module 312 Alpine 3804 switch 111 GM 16X3 module 312 Alpine 3808 switch 1
106. CB or pins on any of the connectors 5 For the BlackDiamond 6816 and the BlackDiamond 6804 ensure that the module is horizontal with the module name to the left the PCB on top and that the ejector injector levers are extended For the BlackDiamond 6808 ensure that the module is vertical with the module name at the top the PCB to the right and that the ejector injector levers are extended a Slide the module into the appropriate slot of the chassis slots 1 through 16 in the BlackDiamond 6816 slots 1 through 8 in the BlackDiamond 6808 or slots 1 through 4 in the BlackDiamond 6804 until it makes contact with the backplane A NOTE Use the metal panel not the PCB to guide the I O module As the module begins to seat in the chassis the ejector injector levers begin to close b To close the ejector injector levers use both hands simultaneously to push the levers toward the center of the module c To secure the module tighten the two captive screws using a 1 Phillips screwdriver A AK note Tighten the screws of this module before inserting additional modules Otherwise you might unseat modules that you have not secured Store the module packaging for future use 7 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install additional I O modules repeat steps 1 through 6 Verifying the I O Module Installation After you
107. CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 329 Module Technical Specifications Table 114 ATM module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 5 25 lbs 2 38 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Direc
108. DRAM modules installed as shown in Figure 112 A NOTE The MSM supports only SODIMMs supplied by Extreme Networks Figure 112 MSM SODIMM sockets l i dD Kp ee e SSeS aay ACTOL YCC pI GD Tr SED 3 C gt JC 50015 oo0oo0o0 iS msmea U J EW_SODMs 230 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing MSMs MSM LEDs Table 68 describes the LED activity on the MSM Table 68 MSM LEDs LED Color Indicates SYS Green blinking Normal operation is occurring Amber blinking Diagnostic test is in progress Amber Diagnostic failure has occurred Off Switch is not receiving power MSTR Green Module is operating as master Amber Module is operating as slave ENV Green Environment temperature fan power supply is operating properly Amber Environmental failure has occurred ERR Amber A critical software error has been logged since power up Off Normal operation is occurring Link Activity Off Link is down Green Link is up Amber Packet activity is occurring A NOTE To reset the critical software error LED amber ERR LED use the clear log static command and reboot the switch If you continue to have critical software errors or the ERR LED is amber after the clear log static command and a switch reboot contact Extreme Networks Customer Support Installing MSMs The BlackDiamond MSM module is hot swappable You do not need to power off the system to inse
109. EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 320 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond Modules Table 105 G16X3 and G24T3 module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 7 5 lbs 2 81 kg Safety Certifications and Standards UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC60950 2000 CB plus deviations TUV R GS Mark Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 NOM NYCE S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 G16X3 only FCC 21 CFR subpart J G16X only CDRH G16X3 only Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 8 11 CISPR22 1997 Class A CISPR24 1998 ETSI EN 300 386 2001 EN61000 3 2 3 3 CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 354
110. Fan Tray The Alpine 3808 fan tray no 45013 e Contains five individual fans e Is preinstalled at the factory e Is accessed from the front of the chassis e Is hot swappable which means you can remove and replace the fan tray without powering down the switch e Can be removed and installed by customers A CAUTION Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilation holes at the rear of the unit Doing so can result in overheating and possible damage to the Alpine 3808 switch Thermal sensors will shut down the Alpine 3808 switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius ExtremeWare monitors the fan trays in the Alpine 3808 switch for failure and overheat conditions All fan failures and over temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch log See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for more information about switch monitoring Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 183 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Fan Tray Alpine 3804 Fan Tray The Alpine 3804 fan tray no 45015 e Contains three individual fans e Is preinstalled at the factory e Is accessed from the front of the chassis e Is hot swappable which means you can remove and replace the fan tray without powering down the switch e Can be removed and installed by customers A CAUTION Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilation holes at the rear of the unit Doing so can result in overheating and possibl
111. GBIC slot must remain empty e Install two or less LX100 GBICs per GM 4Xi module and leave the remaining GBIC slots empty e Install two or less LX100 GBICs per GM 4Xi module and install any combination of the following GBICs into the empty slots 1000BASE 5X 1000BASE LX ZX GBIC ZX Rev 03 LX70 UTP GBIC To ensure correct operation of the LX100 GBIC make sure that you run ExtremeWare 6 1 9 or later on your switch Table 14 UTP GBIC specifications Bit Error Rate Data Min Distance Max Distance Media Type Errors per Second Rate Meters Meters Category 5 UTP cable 10 12 1 Gbps 2 80 Requirements for the UTP GBIC The UTP GBIC operates in full duplex mode only The UTP GBIC does not operate in 10 100 Mbps mode and it does not support autonegotiation of link speed You need to disable autonegotiation on the ports that use the UTP GBIC and manually configure the port speed to 1000 Mbps Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 27 Summary of Common Switch Features The following example disables autonegotiation configures a port speed of 1000 Mbps and specifies full duplex mode for port 4 on a stand alone switch config ports 4 auto off speed 1000 duplex full The following example disables autonegotiation configures a port speed of 1000 Mbps and specifies full duplex mode for port 1 on a G8Xi module located in slot 1 of a modular switch config ports 1 1 auto off speed 1000 duplex full
112. GM4T The GM 4Ti module has four Gigabit Ethernet ports All Gigabit Ethernet ports on this module use standard RJ 45 connectors and autonegotiate for 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T The default configuration of the GM 4Ti module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in autonegotiation mode LEDs The GM 4Ti module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status e Port speed For information about the LEDs and their activity on the GM 4Ti module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 153 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules GM 4Xi Module Figure 69 shows the GM 4Xi module Figure 69 GM 4Xi module Module status Gigabit Ethernet ports LED 5 z GMAX Faas 45112 N O ai Egu Cu wD woe D it ij Port status LEDs 38_GM4X The GM 4Xi module has four GBIC based Gigabit Ethernet ports All Gigabit Ethernet ports on this module use standard GBIC connectors and support 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX and 1000BASE LX70 The default configuration of the GM 4Xi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in autonegot
113. LEDs of the ARM module Captive retaining screw Module status LED ore Module diagnostics LED Ost om 7 LI E Ejector injector 0 l 7 handle In i 0 ning ry i za I ra Network processors and heat sinks S I IDM OO oc Service ports General Purpose Processor GPP ARM_005 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 263 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Software Requirements The ARM module requires that you run ExtremeWare 7 0 or later on both the MSM module and the ARM module BootROM 7 8 for the MSM module and BootROM 1 18 for the ARM module For more information about the software requirements ARM module features and ARM module configurations see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Hardware Requirements The ARM module is compatible with i series MSMs only For the most current list of I O modules supported for use with the ARM module consult your release notes ARM modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet I O module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly 264 Extreme Networks Consolidat
114. M 4E1i module Port status LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports WME 7 7 T T z 45306 i ee o Module status LEDs E1 ports 38_WM4E1 The WM 4E1i module has four E1 ports using RJ 48 connectors and two 10 100 Mbps autonegotiating Ethernet ports using standard RJ 45 connectors The WM 4E1i also has eight internal loopback ports that allow you to configure bi directional rate limiting without tying up any of the external ports for ingress rate shaping Internal loopback ports are marked with the notation iL when displayed on the command line or with ExtremeWare Vista Web access The WM 4E1i module supports E1 and autonegotiation of 1OBASE T and 100BASE T The default configuration of the WM 4E1i module is as follows e The four E1 ports allow 2 048 Mbps and the other two ports in autonegotiation mode allow 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and full duplex or half duplex operation LEDs The WM 4E1i module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the WM 4E1i module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The WM 4E1i module requires ExtremeWare version 6 1 5 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later For more information about software requirements and WM 4E1i module configuration see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide 176 Extreme Net
115. MSMs in the BlackDiamond 6816 switch and up to two MSMs in the BlackDiamond 6808 and BlackDiamond 6804 switches The BlackDiamond 6800 series switch has a 100 passive backplane which means the backplane does not contain any active components that can fail A passive backplane is important because it increases 194 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Following Safety Information the reliability of the switch The I O modules treat the backplane as one logical connection and use the same load sharing trunking algorithm as the front facing ports to distribute the switch traffic There are multiple Gigabit links from the I O modules to the MSMs and most I O modules have eight full duplex Gigabit Ethernet links to the backplane that provide 16 bps full duplex bandwidth to the backplane If one of the backplane Gigabit Ethernet links fails ExtremeWare reroutes the switch traffic from the failed backplane Gigabit Ethernet link to another available backplane link By moving to another available backplane link switch connectivity is not disrupted With ExtremeWare 6 1 or later you can configure the backplane load sharing algorithm The default load sharing algorithm uses ingress port based trunking In an Internet bridging or routing environment the address based algorithm may be more appropriate For more information about how to configure the backplane load sharing algorithm see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide Packet Switching
116. N Do not install I O modules into the top unnumbered slot of the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 chassis this slot is designated for SMMi modules only I O modules do not fit in the top slot of the Alpine 3808 or the Alpine 3804 chassis Forceful insertion can damage the I O module 2 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 3 Remove the blank faceplate from the slot to make room for the module if applicable A NOTE Any unoccupied module slot in the chassis should have a blank faceplate installed to ensure satisfactory protection from EMI and to guarantee adequate airflow through the chassis 4 Grasp the module by its front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the edge of the metal panel Check the connectors for dust and packing materials AR CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors 5 Ensure that the module is horizontal with the module name to the right the PCB on top and that the ejector injector levers are extended a Slide the module into the appropriate numbered slot of the chassis until it makes contact with the backplane A NOTE Use the metal panel not the PCB to guide the I O module 180 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Verifying the
117. OST During the POST e All ports are temporarily disabled e The packet LED is off e The power LED is on e The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST If the switch passes the POST the MGMT LED blinks at a slow rate one blink per second If the switch fails the POST the MGMT LED shows a solid yellow light A NOTE See Chapter 4 for more information about Summit LED activity Removing and Installing Summit48si AC Power Supplies This section applies to the Summit48si switch AC power supplies only The Summit48si comes with a minimum of one power supply preinstalled at the factory If you have a Summit48si switch follow the instructions in this section for removing and installing the Summit48si AC power supplies For information about removing and installing Summit48si DC power supplies see Installing the Summit48si Switch DC Power Supply on page 101 A NOTE Summit48si power supplies must be serviced by trained service personnel A NOTE If you need to power down the switch remove all of the power cords from the installed power supplies To remove a Summit48si AC power supply Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 97 Summit Switch Installation 1 Remove the power cable from the wall outlet and then from the switch A CAUTION Shock hazard 2 Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two retaining screws as shown in Figure 40 Figure 40 Removing the re
118. St SI Si Si Sis tam bo R AAAAAAA Seeeeeaed AAAA wow es fa PES Gem g Extreme Networks Summit 200 48 SOLE 1000 baseT ports LC48001 Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector for connecting a terminal and carrying out local management Port Connections The Summit 200 48 switch has 48 1OBASE T 100BASE TX ports using RJ 45 connectors for communicating with end stations and other devices over 10 100Mbps Ethernet The switch also has four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports These ports are labeled 49 and 50 on the front panel of the switch Two of the ports are 10 100 1000BASE T ports using RJ 45 connectors The other two ports are unpopulated receptacles for mini SFP GBICs using optical fibers with LC connectors The Summit 200 48 switch supports the use of 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 1000BASE ZX mini GBICs A NOTE Only mini GBICs that have been certified by Extreme Networks available from Extreme Networks should be inserted into the mini GBIC receptacles on the Summit 200 series switch Only two of the four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports can be active at one time For example you can use both 1000BASE T ports both mini GBIC ports or a combination of one 1000BASE T port and one mini GBIC A NOTE For information on the mini GBIC see Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support on page 20 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 89
119. Technical Specifications is organized according to the family of switch and modules available for that switch and describes module specifications such as physical dimensions weight and standards Information that is common to all modules is described at the end of the appendix 16 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A ei Common Features Summary of Common Switch Features This chapter describes the features that are shared in common by the Extreme Networks family of switches The following topics are described in greater detail e Software Images on page 19 e Full Duplex Support on page 20 e Management Ports on page 20 e Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support on page 20 e GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support on page 24 Software Images When you receive a new Extreme Networks switch be aware that an the ExtremeWare software image and a BootROM image has been preinstalled at the factory To verify the software image you are running on your switch use the show version command The show version command displays the hardware and software versions currently running on the switch To ensure that you have the latest software and BootROM image go to the support login portion of the Tech Support page at http www extremenetworks com services If your switch is running ExtremeWare version 6 2 or later the Power LED activity is different from previous versions of ExtremeWare All other LED activity
120. The labels on the bottom of the Summit48si switch display important information about your switch Write down the following information before you install the switch 84 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit48si Switch LEDs e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device A NOTE The label that indicates country and safety certifications for the Summit48si switch is located on the bottom of the switch Summit48si Switch LEDs Table 28 describes the LED activity on the Summit48si switches Table 28 Switch LED activity for the Summit48si switch LED Color Indicates Unit Status LEDs MGMT Green The switch is operating normally Power On Self Test POST or software download in progress Amber The switch has failed its POST or is experiencing an overheat or fan failure Port Status LEDs Green Link is present port is enabled Green blinking Frames are being transmitted received on this port Off Link is not present port is disabled 100 1000 Mbps Speed LEDs Green Port is operating at 1000 Mbps Off Port is operating at 100 Mbps 10 100 Management Port LED Summit5i and Summit7i Green Link is present Amber Frames are being transmitted Off Link is not pres
121. Unit continues to function after the test without operator intervention e C Temporary loss of function is permitted provided the function is self recoverable or can be recovered by the operation of controls 324 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond Modules Table 109 F48Ti and F96Ti module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 6 25 lbs 2 81 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3
122. able 89 Summit i series switch specifications Physical Dimensions Summitti Height 3 5 inches 8 9 cm Width 17 25 inches 43 8 cm Depth 19 0 inches 48 3 cm Weight 22 Ibs 10 kg Summit5i Height 3 5 inches 8 9 cm Width 17 25 inches 43 8 cm Depth 19 0 inches 48 3 cm Weight single power supply 21 7 lbs 9 8 kg Weight dual power supply 27 4 Ibs 12 4 kg Summit7i Height 7 0 inches 17 8 cm Width 17 25 inches 43 8 cm Depth 19 0 inches 48 3 cm Weight single power supply 45 Ibs 20 4 kg Weight dual power supply 55 Ibs 24 9 kg Summit48i Height 3 5 inches 8 9 cm Width 17 25 inches 43 8 cm Depth 19 0 inches 48 3 cm Weight 24 Ibs 10 8 kg Summit48si Height 1 75 inches 4 45 cm Width 17 3 inches 43 9 cm Depth including PSU handle 18 25 inches 46 41 cm Weight 14 lbs 6 35 kg Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 299 Switch Technical Specifications Safety Certifications and Standards UL 1950 3rd Edition listed cUL listed to CAN CSA C22 2 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 A11 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility EMI EMC Certifications and Standards FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR
123. abled Media Selection Fiber LEDs Ports 25 and 26 Color Indicates Green Fiber link is selected mini GBIC is present and being used for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink Off 1000BASE T link is selected the switch is using the RJ 45 port for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink Unit Stacking ID Number LED Color Indicates N A When several Summit 200 24 switches are interconnected stacked each switch will be assigned a unique stacking ID number that will be visible in the unit stacking ID number LED The switch acting as the stack master will be assigned the number 0 which is the default A NOTE For more information about configuring and using the Summit200 24 switch see the Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 88 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit 200 48 Switch Front View Summit 200 48 Switch Front View The Summit 200 48 switch 1U in height and provides 48 autosensing 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports using RJ 45 connectors It also provides two 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports using RJ 45 connectors and two optical ports that also allow Gigabit Ethernet uplink connections through Extreme 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 1000BASE ZX SFP mini GBICs using optical fibers with LC connectors Figure 35 shows the Summit 200 48 switch front view Figure 35 Summit 200 48 switch front view Console 10 100 Mbps ports Mini GBIC ports port EGESIGIGOSISISHS CEESISISIGISISIG BHtSt
124. ality features and flexibility The GPP subsystem handles system control and MPLS management functions The GPP subsystem resides outside the packet forwarding data path to optimize routing and billing performance Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 265 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules MPLS LED Indicators The MPLS module is equipped with two module level LED indicators STATUS and DIAG see Figure 133 e STATUS LED Located near the top end of the front panel near the ejector injector handle This LED indicator is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals the operating status of the module e DIAG LED Located beside the STATUS LED The LED is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals whether diagnostics are being run on the module A NOTE During the MPLS module boot up the Status and Diag LEDs may be incorrectly lit to solid green or solid amber The LEDs reflect their true state after approximately 30 seconds when the module has completed its boot cycle For more information on MPLS module LED activity see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Service Ports The MPLS module is equipped with two front panel service ports one port is a subminiature DB 9 connector the other is a micro HD 15 connector see Figure 133 The ports are reserved for use only by Extreme Networks technical support personnel for diagnostic purposes Figure 133 Showing the components
125. ally recognized as a standard in site planning and cabling For information go to http www bicsi org Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 47 Site Preparation Cable Labeling and Record Keeping A reliable cable labeling system is essential when planning and installing a network Maintaining accurate records helps you to e Relocate devices easily e Make changes quickly e Isolate faults in the distribution system e Locate the opposite end of any cable e Know the types of network devices that your cabling infrastructure can support Consider the following recommendations when setting up a cable labeling system suitable for your installation e Identify cables by securely attaching a label to all cable ends e Assign a unique block of sequential numbers to the group of cables that run between each pair of wiring closets e Assign a unique identification number to each distribution rack e Identify all wiring closets by labeling the front panel of your Extreme Networks equipment and other hardware e Keep accurate and current cable identification records e Post records near each distribution rack Include the following cable drop information the cable source destination and jumper location Installing Cable Consider the following recommendations when you connect cable to your network equipment e Examine cable for cuts bends and nicks e Support cable using a cable manager that is mounted above conne
126. ance 0 20 dB km 9 dB 45 km 0 25 dB km 9 dB 36 km 0 30 dB km 9 dB 30 km A minimum of 2 dB attenuation is required to prevent saturation of the receiver LEDs The GM WDMi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the GM WDMi module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The GM WDMi module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 8 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later on your switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 159 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules GM 16X Module Figure 72 shows the GM 16X3 module Figure 72 GM 16X3 module i AMALIE aii 45121 i iE i El el Sl A a A A a A aj Ml l Port status LEDs Mini GBIC ports Module status LED GM16X3 The GM 16X3 module has 16 1000BASE X ports using mini GBIC or small form factor pluggable SFP slots The GM 16X ports are oversubscribed 4 1 to the Alpine backplane The module has four groups of four ports each Each group multiplexes traffic into a single full duplex gigabit link to the switch fabric To take advantage of this architecture use a single port in each group before using all of the ports in any particular group Table 47 lists the port groups for the GM 16X module Table 47 GM 16X port groups Ports Group 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 2 9 10 11 12 3 13 14 15 16 4 Populate ports 1 5 9 and 13 t
127. and LEDs of the MPLS module Captive retaining screw C Module status LED MPLS i i Ee Module diagnostics LED Ejector injector _ 00 Pn a handle Network processors and heat sinks Service ports u E ES J E General Purpose Processor GPP MPLS_15 266 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Software Requirements The MPLS module requires that you run ExtremeWare 7 0 or later on both the MSM module and the MPLS module BootROM 7 8 for the MSM module and BootROM 1 18 for the MPLS module For more information about the software requirements MPLS module features and MPLS module configurations see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Hardware Requirements The MPLS module is compatible with i series MSMs only For the most current list of I O modules supported for use with the MPLS module consult your release notes MPLS modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet I O module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 267 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules A3cSi and A3cMi Modules Figure 134 shows the A3
128. and Routing Each installed I O module has Gigabit Ethernet links that attach to the backplane The backplane divides these links equally among the MSMs that are installed in the switch For example if you install an F48Ti module it has eight Gigabit Ethernet links to the switch backplane If you have a BlackDiamond 6816 and install four MSMs each module receives two of the eight Gigabit Ethernet links If you have a BlackDiamond 6808 or a BlackDiamond 6804 and install two MSMs each module receives four of the eight Gigabit Ethernet links Following Safety Information A AA Warnine Read the safety information in Appendix A thoroughly before installing your Extreme Networks switch Failure to follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment e All service to components of a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch should be performed by trained service personnel only Service personnel are persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons A NOTE Electronic components are sensitive to static electricity ESD originating from you or from objects around you can damage these components Exercise every possible precaution to prevent ESD when working around printed circuit assemblies Keep all printed circuit assemblies in protective ESD preventi
129. and captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 145 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module The SMMi has the following out of band management ports e Console port Used to connect a terminal and perform local management e Management port Used to connect an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the management port to view and locally manage the switch configurations e Modem port Used to connect a modem for remote access to the CLI e PCMCIA slot Reserved for future use See Management Ports in Chapter 1 for more information about management ports and for more information about Alpine SMMi module specifications see Appendix C Module Technical Specifications SMMi Memory The SMMi has two 144 pin SODIMM sockets and ships with two 128 MB SODRAM modules installed as shown in Figure 66 A NOTE The SMMi supports only the SODIMMs that are supplied by Extreme Networks Figure 66 SMMi SODIMM sockets J a 20 9 se a M suw meoo e Ca deh a Om a 45014 d 38_SODMs SMMi LEDs Table 42 describes the LED activity on the SMMi Table 42 SMMi LEDs LED Color Indicates DIAG Green blinking Power on Self Test POST is running Off Normal operation STATUS Green blinking Normal operation Yellow blinking Critical error fan failure or over temperature Off Unit
130. ard weight fan tray installing in a BlackDiamond 6804 switch installing in a BlackDiamond 6808 switch installing in a BlackDiamond 6816 switch installing in an Alpine 3804 switch installing in an Alpine 3808 switch removing from a BlackDiamond 6804 switch removing from a BlackDiamond 6808 switch removing from a BlackDiamond 6816 switch removing from an Alpine 3804 switch removing from an Alpine 3808 switch features Alpine 3800 series switch features BlackDiamond 6800 series switch features Summit switch fiber optic cable bend radius care FM 24MFi module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight FM 24SFi module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight FM 24Ti module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight FM 32Pi module FM 32Ti module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight FM 8Vi module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight free standing installation Summit switch 326 326 326 252 325 325 325 325 325 253 325 325 325 325 325 285 285 285 186 186 282 282 282 185 185 109 191 60 49 49 168 315 315 315 315 315 166 315 315 315 315 315 164 314 314 314 314 314 171 170 314 314 314 314
131. are Guide 91 Summit Switch Models 92 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit Switch Installation You can mount the Summit switch in a rack or place it free standing on a tabletop This chapter describes e Mounting the Switch in a Rack on page 93 e Removing and Installing Summit48si AC Power Supplies on page 97 e Installing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket on page 99 e Removing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket from a Power Cable on page 100 e Removing the Switch from a Rack on page 104 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any Summit switch or before you attempt to install or remove the Summit48si power supplies A CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments of performance or procedures other than those specified herein can result in hazardous radiation exposure Mounting the Switch in a Rack To mount the Summit switch into a rack you need the following tools equipment and resources e Helper bracket provided with the Summit7i switch e A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket not provided e Mounting brackets provided e A minimum of four appropriate screws not provided to secure the switch into the rack e 1 Phillips screwdriver e If you have a Summit7i switch a minimum of two people to help install the switch into the rack Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 93 Summit Switch In
132. are requirements ATM module features and ATM module configurations see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide 270 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Hardware Requirements The ATM module is compatible with i series MSMs only For the most current list of I O modules supported for use with the ATM module consult your release notes ATM modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet I O module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 271 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules I O Module LEDs This section describes the LED activity on the BlackDiamond I O modules e Table 85 describes the LED activity on the Ethernet I O modules e Table 86 describes the LED activity on the PoS and ATM modules e Table 87 describes the LED activity on the ARM and MPLS modules Table 85 BlackDiamond Ethernet I O module LEDs LED Color Indicates Status Green blinking Normal operation Amber blinking Configuration error code version error diagnostic failure or other severe module error Off No power DIAG Off Normal operation Amber blinking Diagnostics in progress Amber Diagnostic failure Port x Green Link up Green blinking Link down Amber blinking Packet activity Off Link down Table 86 BlackDiamond PoS and ATM module LEDs LED Color Indicates
133. arried back to earth or to another suitable building ground All Extreme Networks switches are designed with mounting brackets that provide solid metal to metal connection to the rack If you do not use equipment racks you can attach wiring terminals directly to the mounting brackets for appropriate grounding Alpine products have grounding terminals that are mounted on the back of the chassis At minimum follow these guidelines e Ground equipment racks to earth ground CAD weld appropriate wire terminals to building I beams or earth ground rods Use 4 copper wire Drill and tap wire terminals to equipment racks Position the earth ground as close to the equipment rack as possible to maintain the shortest wiring distance possible Properly test the quality of the earth ground A NOTE Because building codes vary worldwide Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you consult an electrical contractor to ensure proper equipment grounding is in place for your specific installation e Ground DC power supplies to earth ground by using the grounding terminals provided Space Requirements for the Rack Provide enough space in front of and behind the switch so that you can service it easily Allow a minimum of 48 inches 122 cm in front of the rack and 24 inches 61 cm behind the rack When using a relay rack provide a minimum of 24 inches 61 cm of space behind the mounted equipment Extra room on each side is op
134. ation requirements Receivers ZX prior to GBIC Type LX70 Rev 03 ZX Rev 03 LX100 LX70 10 dB 10 dB 10 dB 11 dB Transceivers ZX prior to 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 8 dB Rev 03 ZX Rev 03 8 dB 8 dB 8 dB 9 dB LX100 11 dB 11 dB 11 dB 12 dB The ZX mini GBIC is equivalent to the ZX Rev 03 GBIC Safety Information Before you install or replace a GBIC read the safety information in this section AM CAUTION GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam GBICs are class 1 laser devices and they operate at 5 V Use only Extreme approved devices Remove the SC fiber optic or the RJ 45 connector from the GBIC prior to removing the GBIC from the I O module or the switch Preparing to Install or Replace a GBIC This section describes the preparation steps that you must perform before inserting and securing a GBIC AM CAUTION GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam To ensure proper installation complete the following five tasks before inserting the GBIC Inspect and clean the fiber tips coupler and connectors Prepare and clean an external attenuator if needed Calculate the link budget Do not stretch the fiber a A WOW N me Make sure the bend radius of the fiber is not less than 2 inches Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 29 Summary of Common Switch Features In addition to the previously described tasks Extreme Networks recommends th
135. ber blinking mini GBIC port status LED on your Summit48si or Summit 200 series switch a BlackDiamond G16X3 module or an Alpine GM 16X module the mini GBIC installed in your switch or module is not approved supported or certified by Extreme Networks To correct this problem ensure that you install an Extreme Networks certified mini GBIC Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 23 Summary of Common Switch Features To remove a mini GBIC similar to the one labeled Module A in Figure 1 gently depress and hold the black plastic tab at the bottom of the connector to release the mini GBIC and pull the mini GBIC out of the SFP receptacle To remove a mini GBIC connector similar to the one labeled Module B in Figure 1 gently rotate the front handle and pull the mini GBIC out of the SFP receptacle To insert a mini GBIC connector A NOTE Mini GBICs can be installed in the SFP mini GBIC receptacles only 1 Holding the mini GBIC by its sides insert the mini GBIC into the SFP receptacle on the switch or module 2 Slide the mini GBIC into the SFP receptacle until you hear an audible click indicating the mini GBIC is securely seated into the SFP receptacle If the mini GBIC has a handle push up on the handle to secure the mini GBIC GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support Most Extreme Networks switches support two types of GBICs the Parallel ID GBIC and the Serial ID GBIC The switch can identify the media type f
136. cSi and A3cMi modules Figure 134 A3cSi and A3cMi modules Module status LEDs 00 E E Port i Port status g status LEDs o Network LEDs E interface B i ports E E 000 000 000 i Service ports 0 000 000 O BD_A3 2 The A3cSi and A3cMi Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM modules have four OC 3 ports using duplex SC connectors The A3cSi supports single mode fiber optic cable only and the A3cMi support multimode fiber optic cable only These modules interconnect metropolitan area networks across an ATM infrastructure interconnect server co location network sites directly using ATM links and provide connectivity between a legacy Enterprise ATM network and an Ethernet backbone In the first application the metropolitan area network service provider can build service network sites in various cities then use ATM modules in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch to connect those cities to a carrier s ATM infrastructure In the second application operators of server co location networks can use ATM modules in BlackDiamond 6800 series switches to create an ATM based connection between server co location sites The result is that their network is simpler to manage and problems can be isolated and resolved more expediently In the third application a service provider can provide Eth
137. cal product manufacturers Members develop consensus standards for cables wiring and electrical components The address is NEMA 2101 L Street N W Washington D C 20037 USA www nema org Electronics Industry Association EIA a trade association that develops technical standards disseminates marketing data and maintains contact with government agencies in matters relating to the electronics industry The address is EIA 2001 Eye Street N W Washington D C 20006 USA www eia org Federal Communications Commission FCC a commission that regulates all interstate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate in the United States according to the Communications Act of 1934 The FCC regulates all U S telephone and cable systems The address is FCC 1919 M Street N W Washington D C 20554 USA Wiring Closet Considerations You should consider the following recommendations for your wiring closet Ensure that your system is easily accessible for installation and service See Rack Specifications and Recommendations on page 45 for specific recommendations Use appropriate AC power for your switch as described in Table 16 Table 16 AC power requirements Switch Type Country Requirements Alpine Summit North America 13 A service receptacle NEMA 5 15 for 110 220 VAC power supplies Alpine Summit United Kingdom 10 A service receptacle BS 1363 for 110 220 VAC power supplies Alpine Summit Internationa
138. cal Dimensions BlackDiamond Switches BlackDiamond 6816 Height 61 25 inches 155 6 cm Width without rack mount ears 17 50 inches 44 5 cm Width with rack mount ears 19 inches 48 3 cm Depth 19 10 inches 48 51 cm Weight empty chassis 140 lbs 63 5 kg Weight fully loaded chassis 360 lbs 163 3 kg Weight each power supply 30 to 33 Ibs 13 6 to 15 0 kg Weight each module 5 Ibs 2 3 kg BlackDiamond 6808 Height 26 25 inches 66 7 cm Width 17 32 inches 44 cm Depth 18 inches 45 7 cm Weight empty chassis 60 lbs 27 2 kg Weight fully loaded chassis 170 lbs 77 1 kg Weight each power supply 30 to 33 Ibs 13 6 to 15 0 kg Weight each module 5 Ibs 2 3 kg BlackDiamond 6804 Height 19 25 inches 48 9 cm Width 17 32 inches 44 cm Depth 19 inches 48 26 cm Weight empty chassis 57 5 lbs 26 1 kg Weight fully loaded chassis 161 lbs 73 kg Weight each power supply 30 to 33 Ibs 13 6 to 15 0 kg Weight each module 5 Ibs 2 3 kg Safety Certifications and Standards UL 60950 3rd Edition listed cUL listed to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 2000 3rd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility EMI EMC Certifications and Standards Telecommunications FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 33
139. can access the ports in one of the following ways e Through a patch panel by terminating the cable and shield with an RJ 21 connector e Directly by using a cable that is terminated with 12 RJ 45 connectors The RJ 21 connector is shown in Figure 125 Figure 125 RJ 21 connector Screws secure connector to port The default configuration of the F96Ti module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in auto negotiation mode LEDs The F96Ti module has a module status LED For information about the module status LED and its activity on the F96Ti module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 255 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Software Requirements The F96Ti module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 8 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later on the switch Hardware Requirements The F96Ti module requires a BlackDiamond chassis using MSM switch fabric module s Extreme Networks recommends using iPower power supplies part numbers 50020 50021 50022 with F96Ti modules in a BlackDiamond 6800 chassis A BlackDiamond 6800 chassis with the original power supplies part number 50012 will not fewer F96Ti modules than a chassis with iPower power supplies Table 82 lists the number of F96Ti modules that you can install in a BlackDiamond chassis de
140. ced by the International Conference of Building Officials ICBO 5360 South Workman Mill Road Whittier California 90601 USA www icbo org BOCA Basic Building Code produced by the Building Officials and Code Administrators BOCA International Inc 4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills Illinois 60478 USA www bocai org Standard Building Code SBC produced by the Southern Building Code Congress International Inc 900 Montclair Road Birmingham Alabama 35213 USA www sbcci org Five authorities on electrical codes are National Electrical Code NEC Classification USA only a recognized authority on safe electrical wiring Federal state and local governments use NEC standards to establish their own laws ordinances and codes on wiring specifications The NEC classification is published by the National Fire Protection Association NFPA The address is NFPA 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy Massachusetts 02269 USA www nfpa org Underwriters Laboratory UL USA only an independent research and testing laboratory UL evaluates the performance and capability of electrical wiring and equipment to determine whether they meet certain safety standards when properly used Acceptance is usually indicated by the words UL Approved or UL Listed The address is UL 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook Illinois 60062 2096 USA www ul com National Electrical Manufacturing Association NEMA USA only an organization of electri
141. cessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Low Voltage Directive LVD Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 T1 FCC CFR 47 Part 68 T1 CAN CS 03 Canada T1 JATA Green Book Japan E1 CTR 12 13 Europe Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 317 Module Technical Specifications Table 102 WM 1T3i module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 5 lbs 2 7 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN6095
142. ch Models Figure 20 Front view of the Summit5i switch with 1000BASE LX ports 1000 Mbps ports Unit status LEDs sige g cd ea ea eg ERS PA a 73 14s ee 15 T6 Seia Ea Ga ba ggss ort status LEDs Gigabit Ethernet ports SHG_S5LX GBIC Ports All three Summit5i switch models provide four unpopulated GBIC ports with SC connectors You can use the following GBICs in the Summit5i switch e 1000BASE SX e 1000BASE LX e 1000BASE LX70 e ZX GBIC e LX100 e UTP GBIC GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 22 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC type Table 22 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 m optical Window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber a 70 000 1550 nm optical window
143. connector for the eight VDSL ports on the module The cable connector on the FM 8Vi has a Velcro strap to secure the connector on the cable to the module To deliver this VDSL connection to a subscriber the bundle of twisted pairs that are contained in the RJ 21 cable must be separated for connection to individual Mogul 100 customer premises equipment Typically you connect the cable from the FM 8Vi to a punch down block and wire the individual VDSL circuits into RJ 11 jacks for connection to the Mogul 100s Use the two center conductors of the RJ 11 connector to connect the wire pairs Your particular installation depends on the physical cabling in your building The connector on the FM 8Vi requires a male terminated RJ 21 cable The FM 8Vi uses eight of the twenty five pairs in the cable Because the RJ 21 standard was established for telecommunications one wire of each pair is designated as the tip side and the other wire is designated as the ring side Table 55 lists the pin numbers on the connector the color code for the wires and the associated port number for the wire pair Table 55 RJ 21 connector and wire pairs VDSL Ring Side Tip Side Port Pin Number Wire Color Pin number Wire Color 1 1 blue white 26 white blue 2 2 orange white 27 white orange 3 3 green white 28 white green 4 4 brown white 29 white brown 5 5 slate white 30 white slate 6 6 blue red 31 red blue Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 173
144. ctors to avoid unnecessary weight on the cable bundles e Use cable managers to route cable bundles to the left and right of the network equipment to maximize accessibility to the connectors e Provide enough slack approximately 2 to 3 inches 5 08 7 62 cm to provide proper strain relief as shown in Figure 12 e Bundle cable using velcro straps to avoid injuring cables e If you build your own cable ensure that cable is properly crimped e When installing a patch panel using twisted pair wiring untwist no more than 1 inch 2 54 cm of the cable to avoid RF interference e When required for safety and fire rating requirements use plenum rated cable See your local building codes for determining when it is appropriate to use plenum rated cable or refer to IEC standard 850 Keep all ports and connectors free of dust 48 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements A NOTE Unshielded twisted pair UTP cable can build up ESD charges when being pulled into a new installation Before installing category 5 UTP cables discharge ESD from the cable by plugging it into a port on a switch or any network device that is not powered on Figure 12 Properly installed and bundled cable Cable managers supporting and directing cables i Proper bundling of cables a
145. d Hardware Guide 73 Summit Switch Models Figure 23 Front view of the Summit7i switch with 1000BASE SX ports Module status Console Management LEDs port port Reset Modem Management PCMCIA slot button port port LED Port status 1000BASE SX ports Gigabit Ethernet ports LEDs GBIC Ports EW_S7iSX Both Summit7i switch models provide four unpopulated GBIC ports with SC connectors You can use the following GBICs in the Summit7i switch 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE LX70 ZX GBIC LX100 UTP GBIC GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 23 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC type Table 23 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 74 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit7i Switch Front View Table 23 GBIC types and maximum distances continued Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50
146. d to end network solution that provides a nonblocking architecture wire speed switching wire speed IP routing and policy based Quality of Service QoS This chapter describes e Summary of Features on page 191 e Switch Components on page 193 e Following Safety Information on page 195 Summary of Features This section describes the features of the BlackDiamond family of switches If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this guide follow the release notes For more information about configuring the switch refer to the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and The ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide The features of the BlackDiamond 6800 series switches include e I O modules and MSMs are hot swappable e Redundant load sharing hot swappable power supplies e Field replaceable hot swappable fan tray e Autonegotiation for half or full duplex operation on 10 100 Mbps ports e Load sharing on multiple ports Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 191 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Overview e VLANs including support for IEEE 802 10 e STP IEEE 802 1D with multiple STP domains e Policy based QoS e Wire speed IP routing e IP multinetting e DHCP BOOTP relay e RIP version 1 and RIP version 2 e OSPF routing protocol e IPX routing including RIP and SAP e Wire speed IP multicast routing e IGMP and IGMP snooping to control IP multicast traffic e DVMRP e Console RS 232 CLI connection
147. de 165 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules FM 24SFi Module Figure 76 shows the FM 24SFi module Figure 76 FM 24SFi module ENO oneen AST FM 24SF 45212 coe IIIIIITEITITIIII EITTIE Module status LED 100 Mbps ports with status LEDs FM 24SFi The FM 24S5Fi module has 24 100 Mbps Ethernet ports using standard MT RJ connectors The FM 24SFi module supports 1OOBASE FX in single mode only The default configuration of the FM 24SFi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in 100 Mbps single mode Half duplex mode is not supported The total optical system budget for the FM 24SFi module is 11 dB Measure cable plant losses with a 1310 nm light source to verify that your cable plant losses are within the optical budget Table 53 describes the optical specifications for the FM 245Fi module Table 53 FM 24SFi optical interface specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 20 dBm 14 dBm Center wavelength 1510 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 31 dBm Optical input power maximum 8 dBm Operating wavelength 1510 nm General Total system budget 11 dBm LEDs The FM 24S5Fi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the FM 24SFi module se
148. dicators should appear as follows e INT POWER green e STATUS green For more information about I O module LED activity see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Displaying Slot Status Information Assuming the I O module has no problems the show slot lt slot gt command where lt slot gt is the number of the slot where you installed the module displays information about the module including e General information about the module name serial number part number e State of the module power down operational mismatch between the slot configuration and the module in the slot Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 181 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules e Status of the ports on the module For more information about slot status information see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Removing I O Modules All Alpine 3800 series I O modules are hot swappable You do not need to power off the system to remove a module You need the following tools and equipment to remove an I O module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement I O module or blank faceplate if you are not replacing the I O module To remove an I O module 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two captive
149. dle ESD sensitive components To remove additional MSMs repeat steps 1 through 4 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 235 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module 236 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules This chapter describes e Configuring I O Modules on page 237 e Installing I O Modules on page 273 e Removing I O Modules on page 275 e Installing XENPAK Modules on page 276 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any BlackDiamond I O modules BlackDiamond I O modules consist of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch The module carrier also includes ejector injector levers and captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel For more information about BlackDiamond I O module specifications see Appendix C Module Technical Specifications Configuring I O Modules No configuration information is stored on the I O modules all configuration information is stored on the MSM module s When the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch is powered on ExtremeWare generates a default configuration for any slots that contain I O modules The default configuration allows the I O module ports to participate in the VLAN named default The default configuration for the I O module is not preserved unless you ex
150. e Table 25 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 nmoptical window 50 125 pm multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters A NOTE For more information about the supported GBIC types see GBIC Specifications on page 25 LEDs The Summit48i switch has the following LEDs e Unit status e Management e Port status e Port speed For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summit48i switch see Summit 200 24 Switch Front View on page 85 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 79 Summit Switch Models Summit48i Switch Rear View Figure 26 shows the rear view of the Summit48i switch Figur
151. e I O Module LEDs on page 177 166 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Software Requirements The FM 24S5Fi module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 7 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later on your switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 167 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules FM 24MFi Module Figure 77 shows the FM 24MFi module Figure 77 FM 24MFi module oe naa ITITTTITTTETTITTTTT ITITI S Module status LED 100 Mbps ports with status LEDs 38_FM24F The FM 24MFi module has 24 100 Mbps Ethernet ports using standard MT RJ connectors The FM 24MFi module supports 100BASE FX in multi mode only The default configuration of the FM 24MFi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in 100 Mbps multi mode Half duplex mode is not supported The total optical system budget for the FM 24MFi module is 11 dB Measure cable plant losses with a 1310 nm light source to verify that your cable plant losses are within the optical budget Table 54 describes the optical specifications for the FM 24MFi module Table 54 FM 24MFi optical interface specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 20 dBm 14 dBm Center wavelength 1310 nm Receiver Optical input po
152. e Input power 40 to 60 V DC Max input amps 4 2 A Attaching the Connector to the DC Power Supply DC input power is provided through a three pin connector on the front panel of the DC Power supply To attach the cable to the Summit48si DC power supply perform the following steps 1 Plug the three wire cable harness onto the connector on the front of the power supply The pins must align properly for the cable to completely connect Do not force the cable onto the connector until the keyway is aligned properly 2 Tighten the retainer nut on the connector until it is finger tight 3 Secure the tray cable near the rack framework using multiple cable ties to minimize the chance of the connections being disturbed by casual contact with wiring Use at least four cable ties separated 4 apart with the first one located within 6 of the terminal block A NOTE It is not necessary to switch off power from the source when removing the keyed connector from the Summit48si DC power supply Removing the Switch from a Rack To uninstall the Summit switch from a rack you need the following tools equipment and resources e Helper bracket provided with the Summit7i switch e A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket not provided e 1 Phillips screwdriver e If you have a Summit7i switch a minimum of two people to help remove the switch from the rack To remove the Summit switch from a standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack
153. e information about I O module LED activity Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 143 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies 144 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module This chapter describes e Installing SMMi Modules on page 147 e Removing SMMi Modules on page 148 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove the Alpine Switch Management Module SMMi The Switch Management Module SMMi is responsible for upper layer protocol processing and switch management functions in the Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 chassis The SMMi can store two ExtremeWare software images version 6 0 or later and two switch configurations A NOTE The Alpine 3802 switch does not require a separate Switch Management Module All upper layer protocol processing and switch management functions are part of the integrated Switch Management Module that is located in the chassis Figure 65 shows the front view of the SMMi Figure 65 Switch Management Module SMMi Module status Console Modem LEDs port port Cm D h se OJ Module Management PCMCIA slot reset button port 38_SMMi The SMMi module consists of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle in an Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 chassis The module carrier also includes ejector injector levers
154. e system AM CAUTION Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilation holes at the rear of the unit Doing so can result in overheating and possible damage to the BlackDiamond 6808 switch Thermal sensors will shut down the BlackDiamond 6808 switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius ExtremeWare monitors the fan trays in the BlackDiamond 6808 switch for failure and overheat conditions All fan failures and over temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch log See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for more information on switch monitoring 280 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6804 Fan Tray Figure 138 BlackDiamond 6808 fan tray O O O A o l P e o afasia we YY ee e Gf CORRES Cee CER On ta RRR RRR CORRS BE EIRT o tele lol e o E O oe BRRR RRRE RERE RRRS RR RER RRE RES RR RE RRE BRRR 0 0 0 RERE a PR RS BR lt aa BORO OOo ERRE OO aa Ea CREE RRR ea E 0 TTEN S A o 0 COREE o SEEN o oO Le cy k 7 7 7 2 BD_fanx BlackDiamond 6804 Fan Tray The BlackDiamond 6804 fan tray no 50053 e Contains six individual fans e Is preinstalled at the factory e Is accessed from the front of the chassis e Is hot swappable which means you can remove and replace the fan tray without powering down the system AM CAUTION Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilat
155. e 128MB of DRAM in order to support the features in ExtremeWare version 6 0 or later To determine the memory size in your switch use the following command show memory For Summit switches running ExtremeWare 4 0 or later the switch indicates the total DRAM size in megabytes as part of the output For Summit switches running ExtremeWare releases prior to 4 0 you must calculate the memory by taking the sum of the bytes listed under current free and adding to it the bytes listed under current alloc If the sum is greater than 16 000 000 there is no need to upgrade the memory on the switch If this is not the case please contact your supplier Port Connections Summit switches use a combination of the following types of ports e 1000BASE SX ports using 850 nm duplex SC connectors e 1000BASE LX ports using 1300 nm duplex SC connectors e 1000BASE LX ports using 1300 nm duplex LC connectors e 1000BASE SX ports using MT RJ connectors e 1000BASE LX ports using MT RJ connectors e Modular 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX and IEEE 802 3z standard using mini Gigabit Interface Connectors mini GBICs e Modular 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE ZX LX100 and UTP using Gigabit Interface Connectors GBICs The UTP GBIC is supported on i series switches only e 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports using RJ 45 connectors e 100BASE FX ports using 1300 nm duplex SC connectors e 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports using RJ 45 connectors Table 20 describes port con
156. e 26 Rear view of the Summit48i switch AC Connectors Label Console port amp Reset gt button ee 1 Go E H S48i_rr Power Sockets The Summit48i switch supports up to two power supplies Each power supply has its own power socket When a second power supply is installed and connected to a second independent power source both provide a redundant load shared power source to the Summit48i switch If one of the power sources or power supplies fails the second power supply provides all power needs which ensures uninterrupted network operation The switch also sends e A message to the syslog to indicate which power supply failed e An SNMP trap to your network management station A NOTE Summit48i switch power supplies must only be serviced by personnel trained by Extreme Networks Label The label on the rear of the Summit48i switch displays important information about your switch Write down the following information before you install the switch e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device Reset Button Use the reset button to cycle the switch down and bring the switch back up without powering o
157. e Port on page 289 e Logging In for the First Time on page 291 Connecting Equipment to the Console Port Connection to the console port is used for direct local management The console port settings are e Baud rate 9600 e Data bits 8 e Stop bit 1 e Parity None e Flow control XON XOFF The terminal or PC with terminal emulation software that you connect to any Summit Alpine or BlackDiamond switch must be configured with these settings This procedure is described in the documentation supplied with the terminal Appropriate cables are available from your local supplier or you can make your own To ensure the electromagnetic compatibility of the unit only shielded serial cables should be used Table 88 describes the pinouts for a DB 9 male console connector Table 88 Pinouts for the console connector Function Pin Number Direction DCD data carrier detect 1 RXD receive data 2 In TXD transmit data 3 Out DTR data terminal ready 4 Out 5 6 7 In GND ground DSR data set ready RTS request to send In Out Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 289 Initial Switch and Management Access Table 88 Pinouts for the console connector continued Function Pin Number Direction CTS clear to send 8 In Figure 142 shows the pinouts for a 9 pin to 25 pin RS 232 null modem cable Figure 142 Null modem cable pinouts Swi
158. e damage to the Alpine 3804 switch Thermal sensors will shut down the Alpine 3804 switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius ExtremeWare monitors the fan trays in the Alpine 3804 switch for failure and overheat conditions All fan failures and over temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch log See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for more information about switch monitoring Alpine 3802 Fan Tray The Alpine 3802 fan tray e Contains two individual fans e Is preinstalled at the factory e Is not hot swappable which means you must power down the switch before you can remove and replace the fan tray e Cannot be removed and installed by customers e Must be removed and replaced by personnel trained by Extreme Networks A CAUTION Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilation holes at the rear of the unit Doing so can result in overheating and possible damage to the Alpine 3802 switch Thermal sensors will shut down the Alpine 3802 switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius A NOTE In the event of a fan tray failure please contact Extreme Networks ExtremeWare monitors the fan trays in the Alpine 3802 switch for overheat conditions All over temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch log See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for more information about switch monitoring
159. e following when installing or replacing GBICs on an active network e Use the same type of GBIC at each end of the link e Connect one end of the link to the Tx port Without an attenuator measure the total loss from the Tx port to the other site of the link The total loss must not exceed the total optical system budget listed in Figure 2 e Use dispersion shifted fiber whenever possible This provides superior performance in the 1550 nm range After you complete all of these described tasks you are ready to install or replace a GBIC Installing or Replacing a GBIC You can add and remove GBICs from your Extreme Networks switch without powering off the system Figure 3 shows the three types of GBIC connectors Figure 3 GBIC modules Handle Module A Module B Module C EW_GBIC GBICs are a Class 1 laser device Use only Extreme approved devices A NOTE Remove the SC fiber optic or the RJ 45 connector from the GBIC prior to removing the GBIC from the VO module or the switch A CAUTION GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam To remove a GBIC connector similar to the one labeled Module A in Figure 3 gently rotate the front handle up and pull the GBIC out of the slot To remove a GBIC connector similar to one labeled Module B or Module C in Figure 3 gently squeeze the sides to release the GBIC and pull the GBIC out of the slot 30 Extr
160. e oversubscribed 4 1 to the Alpine backplane The module has four groups of four ports each Each group multiplexes traffic into a single full duplex gigabit link to the switch fabric To take advantage of this architecture use a single port in each group before using all of the ports in any particular group Table 50 lists the port groups for the GM 16T module Table 50 GM 16T port groups Ports Group 1 2 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 2 9 10 11 12 3 13 14 15 16 4 Populate ports 1 5 9 and 13 then ports 2 6 10 and 14 followed by ports 3 7 11 and 15 and finally ports 4 8 12 and 16 A NOTE If congestion is detected on a port with flow control enabled a flow control PAUSE frame is sent out that port The PAUSE frame is not sent out on the other ports in the group Table 51 lists the number of GM 16T modules that you can install in an Alpine chassis Table 51 GM 16T configurations supported Chassis GM 16T Modules Alpine 3802 1 or 1 GM 16X3 module installed in slot 1 or slot 2 only Alpine 3804 4 Alpine 3808 8 162 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules The GM 16T module supports distances of up to 100 meters over CAT 5 cabling Each of the 16 ports in the GM 16TS is capable of supporting up to a full gigabit of traffic with a maximum module throughput of 4 Gigabits to the Alpine backplane When a GM 16T gt is operational in an Alpine 3808 and five or more ports
161. e the management port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet RJ 45 connector to plug an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the switch for out of band management This provides you with direct access into the switch and allows you to view and locally manage the switch configurations See Management Ports in Chapter 1 for more information about the management port PCMCIA Slot The PCMCIA slot is reserved for future use Summit7i Switch Rear View Figure 24 shows the rear view for both available Summit7i switch models Figure 24 Rear view of the Summit7i switch Power socket Power socket DED DE OOOO Dono DOO Donno DOON etetatete atetetete etetetete atetetete 1 Gcecesese ecetestece i I RRRRER AAAA m Scececete etecetece EM cececece 020202000 Label MODEL SERIAL No Mac ADDRESS MADE IN USA EW_S7iRr Power Sockets The Summit7i switch supports up to two power supplies Each power supply has its own power socket When a second power supply is installed and connected to a second independent power source both provide a redundant load shared power source to the Summit7i switch If one of the power sources or power supplies fails the second power supply provides all power needs which ensures uninterrupted network operation A NOTE Summit7i switch power supplies must only be serviced by personnel trained by Extreme Networks 76 Extreme Networks Co
162. e usually located on a sticker on the back or bottom of your equipment Then multiply the numbers together to get VA VA Volts x Amperes 2 Add the VA from each piece of equipment together to find the total VA requirement To determine the minimum amperage requirements for your UPS we recommend that you add 30 to the total UPS Transition Time Transition time is the time that is necessary for the UPS to transfer from utility power to full load battery power For Extreme Networks products a transition time of less than 20 milliseconds is required for optimum performance Applicable Industry Standards For more information see the following ANSI TIA EIA standards e ANSI TIA EIA 568 A discusses the six subsystems of a structured cabling system e ANSI TIA EIA 569 A discusses design considerations e ANSI TIA EIA 606 discusses cabling system administration e ANSI TIA EIA 607 discusses commercial building grounding and bonding requirements You can access these standards at http www ansi org or http www tiaonline org Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 55 Site Preparation 56 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A Part 3 Summit Switch Summit Switch Overview This chapter describes Summit Switch Models on page 59 Summary of Features on page 60 Memory Requirements on page 62 Following Safety Information on page 63 Summit Switch Models The following models comp
163. ed Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules MPLS Module Figure 132 shows the MultiProtocol Label Switching MPLS module Figure 132 MultiProtocol Label Switching MPLS module O MPLS o o Module status LEDs 0 a 0 0 3 Service port 7 Reset Service port 0 00 O MPLS_13 The MultiProtocol Label Switching MPLS module contains a powerful set of network processors that are specifically programmed to implement the MPLS function The module has no external ports but it contains four full duplex Gigabit Ethernet internal ports that connect to the BlackDiamond backplane switch fabric Each internal processor provides media speed packet processing for two internal full duplex Gigabit Ethernet ports The MPLS module operates in a one armed fashion e Receiving frames from the switch fabric e Processing the frames e Transmitting the frames back into the switch fabric which then sends them to the appropriate I O module A maximum of four MPLS modules can be placed in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch at any one time Physical Description This section describes the components and the LEDs of the MPLS module as shown in Figure 133 The MPLS module has the following key components e Two high performance network processors e A GPP subsystem wey The network processors are high performance programmable devices that enhance the Extreme i chipset to support expanded function
164. eeds which ensures uninterrupted network operation A AX CAUTION Service to Summit1i power supplies should be performed by trained service personnel only Label The label on the rear of the Summitli switch displays important information about your switch Write down the following information before you install the switch e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device Reset Button Use the reset button to cycle the switch down and bring the switch back up without powering off the switch Your saved switch configuration information is not lost unsaved switch configurations are lost Use a non conductive tool to push the reset button Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector to attach a terminal and access the CLI via a serial connection Use the console port for local management 68 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit5i Switch Front View Summit5i Switch Front View As shown in Figure 18 Figure 19 and Figure 20 the Summit5i switch is 2U in height and is available in three port configurations e 12 autosensing 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports with RJ 45 connectors and 4 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors e 12 1000BASE SX ports w
165. eme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support To insert a GBIC connector 1 Holding the GBIC by its sides insert the GBIC into the slot on the I O module or the switch 2 Slide the GBIC into the slot until you hear an audible click indicating the GBIC is securely seated If the GBIC has a handle push down on the handle to secure the GBIC Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 31 Summary of Common Switch Features 32 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A Part 2 Site Planning site Preparation This chapter describes how to prepare your site for installing Extreme Networks equipment It contains information on environmental and cabling requirements power requirements and building and electrical code organizations This chapter includes these sections e Planning Your Site on page 36 e Meeting Site Requirements on page 36 e Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements on page 47 e Meeting Power Requirements on page 52 e Applicable Industry Standards on page 55 The requirements described in this chapter are intended for the system administrator network equipment technician or network manager who is responsible for installing and managing the network hardware It assumes a working knowledge of local area network LAN operations and a familiarity with communications protocols that are used on interconnected LANs Installation maintenance and removal o
166. emove the AC power cable retaining bracket from a power cable 1 Disconnect the power cable from the power source 2 Loosen the retaining bracket screw To locate the retaining bracket screw see either Figure 42 or Figure 43 3 Gently remove the power cable from the power supply If you are installing a replacement power supply for the Summit48si switch see Removing and Installing Summit48si AC Power Supplies on page 97 for installation procedures After you install the replacement power supply you need to install a new AC power cable retainer See Installing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket on page 99 for more details If you are installing a replacement power cable you need to tighten the AC power cable retaining bracket to the new power cable 100 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Summit48si Switch DC Power Supply Installing the Summit48si Switch DC Power Supply The Summit48si switch comes with one DC power supply that is preinstalled at the factory however you must attach the cabling to the DC power supply for DC power to be available This section describes the steps to successfully install the Summit38si DC power supply Figure 44 shows the Summit48si DC power supply Figure 44 Summit48si DC power supply The Summit48si DC power supplies slide in from the rear of the switch The front of the power supply provides a handle for inserting and removing the power supply from the cha
167. emoving the Chassis To uninstall the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis from a rack you need the following tools equipment and resources e Helper bracket provided e A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket not provided e 1 Phillips screwdriver e A minimum of two people to help remove the chassis from the rack 210 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing the Chassis To uninstall the chassis from a rack 1 Unplug the power cable from the outlet and then from the switch before you attempt to remove the chassis components and the chassis from the rack 2 Mount the helper bracket in the rack directly beneath the chassis using four screws that are appropriate for your rack 3 To reduce weight and prevent possible equipment damage use a 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the e Power supply e MSM module s e I O module s For information about removing power supplies see Chapter 14 For information about removing the MSM see Chapter 15 For information about removing I O modules see Chapter 16 4 Unscrew the chassis from the rack 5 Have a minimum of two people gently remove the chassis from the rack and place it on a secure flat surface with the front of the chassis facing you 6 Unscrew the helper bracket and remove it from the rack Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 211 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis 212 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware G
168. en a power supply fails and when a power supply is hot swapped Reset Button Use the reset button to cycle the switch down and bring the switch back up without powering off the switch Your saved switch configuration information is not lost unsaved switch configurations are lost Use a non conductive tool to push the reset button Summit48si Power Supply LEDs Table 26 describes the LED activity on the Summit48si AC power supply Table 26 AC power supply LED activity for the Summit48si LED Color Indicates PSU Status LED Green AC input is above a minimum threshold or no PSU is present Amber The PSU is not receiving adequate power Off No power is present Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 83 Summit Switch Models Table 27 describes the LED activity on the Summit48si DC power supply Table 27 DC power supply LED activity LED Color Indicates DC out Green All DC outputs are operational Amber One or more DC outputs have failed Off Input voltage is not present DC in Green Input voltage is within range Off Input voltage is not applied DC input voltage is below 30 V or more than 79 V or input fuse is burned out Summit48si Switch Bottom View Figure 32 shows the bottom view for the Summit48si switch Figure 32 Bottom view of the Summit48si switch nn I Ll 48i1_btm Labels
169. ent Summit 200 24 Switch Front View The Summit 200 24 is 1U in height and has 24 autosensing 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports using RJ 45 connectors It also provides two 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports using RJ 45 connectors and two optical ports that also allow Gigabit Ethernet uplink connections through Extreme 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 1000BASE ZX mini GBICs using LC optical fiber connectors Figure 33 shows the Summit 200 24 switch front view Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 85 Summit Switch Models Figure 33 Summit 200 24 switch front view 10 100 Mbps ports Mini GBIC Unit stacking Console port status LEDs ID LED port ao agigi GrGiwsog 6GtG5 Jars meee O a T T T T TEO ee E ep A 1000 baseT ports L Mini GBIC ports LC24001A Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector for connecting a terminal and carrying out local management Port Connections The Summit 200 24 switch has 24 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports using RJ 45 connectors for communicating with end stations and other devices over 10 100Mbps Ethernet The switch also has four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports These ports are labeled 25 and 26 on the front panel of the switch Two of the ports are 10 100 1000BASE T ports using RJ 45 connectors The other two ports
170. eries Switch Chassis The Alpine 3804 switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of port configurations 128 switched 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet ports 96 switched 100BASE FX Fast Ethernet ports 16 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports 64 switched 1000BASE X oversubscribed ports 64 switched 10 100 1000BASE T oversubscribed ports 16 switched T1 ports 16 switched E1 ports 32 switched Ethernet over VDSL ports 4 switched T3 ports Figure 48 shows the Alpine 3804 chassis installed with one required SMMi and five optional I O modules Figure 48 Front view of the Alpine 3804 switch with sample I O modules installed FIME2SE S232 588 TITITItiT 11 T Ha nee Cee d NF E E E FM S2T7 45210 4 _ ESD a505 wrist stra a Alpine gQ pe treme 4 lol con AecIOr Fan tray w D M sum SMMi m module slot 5 z z cne E aae o o me eM we A O module M E slots 38_3804 118 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3804 Switch Rear View Figure 49 shows the rear view of the Alpine 3804 switch Figure 49
171. ernet based services by using ATM modules in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch to connect their Enterprise ATM network to an Ethernet backbone Extreme Networks offers the ATM module in the following configurations e A3cSi four OC 3 single mode intermediate reach optical interfaces e A3cMi four OC 3 multimode short reach optical interfaces A NOTE The c in the names of the modules indicates that the optical interfaces on these modules operate in concatenated mode which enables all the bandwidth to be devoted to a single payload stream 268 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules A NOTE The ATM module is a Class 1 laser device The default configuration of the A3cSi and A3cMi modules is as follows Ports 1 and 3 e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN VLANid and so forth Table 84 describes the specifications for the A3cSi optical interface Table 84 Optical interface specifications for the ATM modules Parameter A3cSi A3cMi Power budget 13 dB 9 dB Operating wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm Transmit distance 15 km 9 32 mi 2 km 1 24 mi Physical Description This section describes the components and the LEDs of the ATM module as shown in Figure 129 The ATM module has the following key components e Two high performance network processors e A GPP subsystem wen 1 The network processors are programmable devices
172. etworks Consolidated Hardware Guide 261 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules ARM Figure 130 shows the Accounting and Routing Module ARM Figure 130 Accounting and Routing Module ARM gt lge p880 o Module status LEDs Service port M Reset Service port omeo OOOO DOOD aoao o OoOo b SS ARM_001 The ARM is a self contained module for the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis based system Unlike most other BlackDiamond modules there are no external interfaces on the ARM Instead the ARM provides advanced IP services for the other I O modules installed in the chassis The ARM contains a powerful set of packet processing resources and four full duplex Gigabit Ethernet internal ports that connect to the BlackDiamond backplane switch fabric The ARM operates in a one armed fashion e Receiving frames from the switch fabric e Processing the frames e Transmitting the frames back into the switch fabric which then sends them to the appropriate I O module A maximum of four ARM modules can be placed in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch at any one time Physical Description This section describes the components and the LEDs of the ARM module as shown in Figure 131 The ARM module has the following key components e Two high performance network processors e A GPP subsystem EU The network processors are high performance programmable devices that enhance the Extreme i chipse
173. f a switch chassis or its components must be done by qualified service personnel only Qualified service personnel have had appropriate technical training and experience that is necessary to be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed when performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other people By carefully planning your site you can maximize the performance of your existing network and ensure that it is ready to migrate to future networking technologies To learn more about safety issues and to ensure safety compliance see Appendix A A WaRnine Read the safety information in Appendix A thoroughly before installing your Extreme Networks switch Failure to follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 35 Site Preparation Planning Your Site To install your equipment successfully you should plan your site carefully The site planning process has three major steps Step 1 Meeting Site Requirements Your physical installation site must meet several requirements for a safe and successful installation e Building and electrical code requirements e Environmental safety and thermal requirements for the equipment you plan to install e Distribution rack requirements Step 2 Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements After examining your physical site and ensuring all environment requirements are met y
174. ff the switch Your saved switch configuration information is not lost unsaved switch configurations are lost Use a non conductive tool to push the reset button Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector to attach a terminal and access the CLI via a serial connection Use the console port for local management 80 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit48si Switch Front View Summit48si Switch Front View The Summit48si switch is 1U in height and has 48 autosensing 1OBASE T 100BASE TX ports and 2 mini GBIC ports with LC connectors Figure 27 shows the front view of the Summit48si switch Figure 27 Front view of the Summit48si switch Mini GBIC port status LEDs ane 10 100 Mbps ports with status LEDs Mini GBIC ports 48si_fr Figure 28 shows a close up view of the Summit48si LEDs and ports Figure 28 View of LEDs and ports on the Summit48si switch Console Mini GBIC port port status LEDs m 10 100 Mbps ports with status LEDs CONSOLE Mini GBIC ports 48si_dtl Mini GBIC Ports The Summit48si switch has two unpopulated Extreme mini GBIC ports using LC connectors You can use the 1000BASE SX mini GBIC the 1000BASE LX mini GBIC or the ZX mini GBIC in the Summit48s
175. fiber tips coupler and connectors 3 Prepare and clean an external attenuator if needed 4 Do not stretch the fiber 22 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support 5 Make sure the bend radius of the fiber is not less than 2 inches 5 08 cm In addition to the previously described tasks Extreme Networks recommends the following when installing or replacing mini GBICs on an active network e Use the same type of mini GBIC at each end of the link e Connect one end of the link to the Tx port Without an attenuator measure the total loss from the Tx port to the other site of the link The total loss must not exceed the total optical system budget After you complete these described tasks you are ready to install or replace a mini GBIC Installing and Removing a Mini GBIC You can add mini GBICs into or remove mini GBICs from your Summit48si and Summit 200 series switches BlackDiamond G16X module or Alpine GM 16X module without powering off the system Figure 1 shows the two types of mini GBIC connectors Figure 1 Mini GBIC modules Module A Module B xM 024 Mini GBICs are a 3 3 V Class 1 laser devices Use only Extreme approved devices A CAUTION Mini GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam A NOTE Remove the LC fiber optic connector from the mini GBIC prior to removing the mini GBIC from the switch If you see an am
176. figurations available on the different Summit switch models Table 20 Port configurations on all Summit switch models 10BASE T Ethernet Ports 4999BASE 1000BASE 100 1000 Redundant 100BASE 100BASE Switch Model SX LX BASE T GBIC GBIC TX FX Other Summit1i SX 6 2 Summit1i TX 6 2 Summit5i SX 12 4 Summit5i LX 12 4 Summit5i TX 12 4 Summit7i SX 28 4 62 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Following Safety Information Table 20 Port configurations on all Summit switch models continued Ethernet Ports 1999BASE 1000BASE 100 1000 Redundant 00BASE 100BASE Switch Model SX LX BASE T GBIC GBIC TX FX Other Summit7i TX 28 4 Summit48i 2 2 48 Summit48si 2 48 Summit 200 24 2 24 2 Summit 200 48 2 48 2 The Summit 200 series switch has two 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports using RJ 45 connectors and two optical ports that also allow Gigabit Ethernet uplink connections through mini GBICs using optical fibers with LC connectors Following Safety Information a AA WARNING Read the safety information in Appendix A thoroughly before installing your Extreme Networks switch Failure to follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment e All service to components of a Summit series switch should be performed by trained service personnel only Service personnel are persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of the hazards
177. fter approximately 30 seconds when the module has completed its boot cycle For more information on ATM module LED activity see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Service Ports The ATM module is equipped with two front panel service ports one port is a DB 9 connector the other is a micro HD 15 connector see Figure 135 Both ports are reserved for use only by Extreme Networks technical support personnel for diagnostic purposes Figure 135 Showing the components and LEDs of the ATM module Captive retaining screw Module status LED Module diagnostics LED Ejector injector _ handle Network processors and heat sinks E Network interface ports E Four on OC 3 ATM module 2 Port status LED x one per port Service ports General Purpose Processor GPP ATM_002 Software Requirements The ATM module requires that you run ExtremeWare 7 0 or later on both the MSM module and the ATM module BootROM 7 8 for the MSM module and BootROM 1 18 for the ATM module For more information about the softw
178. ge 272 Software Requirements The WDMi module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 5 or later on the switch 248 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules 10GLRi Module Figure 121 shows the 10GLRi module Figure 121 10GLRi module 54002 Module status LEDs t Port status LED IYAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVZ 1 0 0 0 Bt 10 Gbps port 100000 at 3 XM_042 The 10GLRi module has one 10GBASE LR port that supports single mode fiber using standard SC connectors The module has the bandwidth to blow through any bottleneck and has bandwidth management traffic shaping and policy based QoS capabilities The default configuration of the module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in auto negotiation mode When you install the fiber optic cable using the SC connectors be sure you hear a click as the cable is installed This sound ensures that you have properly seated the connector and that it is completely latched in the port If the cable is not fully inserted in the port the link my have many errors and my not come up properly You must use single mode fiber optic cable Table 77 summarizes the optical parameters for the 1OGLRi module Table 77 10GLRi optical parameters Parameter Value Minimum launch power 2 6 2 dBm Max
179. h To install an AC power cable retaining bracket 1 Disconnect the power cable from the switch and the power source 2 Remove the two retaining screws from the power socket on the rear of the switch using a 2 Phillips screwdriver Keep the screws for future use 3 Slide the retaining bracket over the power cable as shown in Figure 42 If necessary loosen the retaining bracket screw Figure 42 Attaching the retaining bracket to the power socket Retaining bracket screw 4 Connect the power cable to the switch A AA CAUTION Do not connect the power cable to the power source at this time 5 Attach the retaining bracket to the power socket using the existing screws as shown in Figure 42 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 99 Summit Switch Installation 6 Tighten the retaining bracket screw If your switch has two power supplies install the second retaining bracket now by repeating the preceding steps Align the retaining brackets as shown in Figure 43 so that the retaining bracket screws do not interfere with each other Figure 43 Attaching two retaining brackets Retaining bracket screw Retaining bracket screw SH_002 7 Connect the power cable s to the power source Removing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket from a Power Cable Before you can remove a power cable from the power supply you need to loosen the retaining bracket from the cable To r
180. hand beneath the power supply to support it as you pull it out of the chassis 8 If you are going to install a replacement power supply follow the installation steps on page 136 9 If there is a problem with the power supply that you removed contact Extreme Networks for assistance Do not attempt to fix a faulty power supply Personal injury to yourself or others may occur 10 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 DC Power Supply The Alpine 3802 switch supports two DC power supplies that come preinstalled from the factory This section describes the steps to successfully power your Alpine 3802 DC power supplies e Selecting the cabling e Attaching the cabling and supplying power e Verifying a successful installation For centralized DC power connections install only in a restricted access area A NOTE Ground the rack mount the chassis in a rack and ground the chassis before installing any switch components Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 141 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies Complete the following tasks before installing any switch components e Ground the rack For more information about grounding the rack see Protective Grounding for the Rack on page 46 e Mount the chassis in a rack For more information about mounting the chassis see Installing t
181. he Chassis on page 124 e Ground the chassis For more information about grounding the chassis see Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis on page 127 In the event of a power supply failure please contact Extreme Networks about servicing and replacing your power supply A NOTE Alpine 3802 power supplies must be removed and replaced by personnel that have been trained by Extreme Networks and in accordance with all local and national electrical codes Selecting the Cabling Use the following guidelines when selecting cabling for the DC power supplies e Each DC power supply requires 6 5 A at 48 VDC nominal or equivalent power between 40 and 70 VDC e For DC power and ground cables use 14 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Use power cables with the specifications outlined in Table 41 Table 41 Source DC power specifications for the Alpine 3802 Characteristic Specification DC power cable size 14 AWG high strand count copper wire Power 40 70 VDC 7 5 A max Attaching the Cabling and Supplying Power After you receive your Alpine 3802 you need to attach the cabling so you can supply power to the chassis To attach the cable to the lugs and then to the DC power supply perform the following steps 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end of the ESD strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 Remove
182. he mounting bracket into the Summit48si switch Alternate long bracket 48si_rack 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the other side of the switch 8 Insert the switch into the rack and ensure that ventilation holes are not obstructed If you are installing a Summit7i switch you need a minimum of two people to help lift and place the switch on the helper bracket and slowly guide the switch into the rack 9 While holding the switch secure it with suitable screws not provided If you are installing a Summit7i switch remove the helper bracket after you secure the chassis 10 Connect the Summit switch to a redundant power supply if applicable 11 To turn on power to the system connect the AC power cable s to the switch and then to the wall outlet s A NOTE The Summit1i Summit5i Summit7i Summit48i and the Summit48si switches do not have on off switches 96 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing and Installing Summit48si AC Power Supplies Placing the Switch on a Table or Shelf The Summit switch comes with four self adhesive rubber pads You can place up to four Summit switches on top of one another Apply the pads to the underside of each switch and place a pad at each marked corner of the switch Place the switches on top of one another ensuring that the corners align Verifying a Successful Installation After you supply power to the Summit switch the switch performs a power on self test P
183. he unit e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector BlackDiamond 6804 Switch The BlackDiamond 6804 switch consists of the following components e One 6 slot chassis with backplane e Four I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 4 e Two MSM64i slots labeled slots A and B e Two power supply bays accessed from the front of the unit e One fan tray accessed from the front of the unit e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector BlackDiamond Power Supplies Three types of power supplies are available for the BlackDiamond switches e 220 VAC e 110 VAC e 48 VDC All installed power supplies must be of the same type You cannot mix 110 VAC 220 VAC and 48 VDC power supplies in a single chassis All BlackDiamond power supplies are hot swappable They are also load sharing If one power supply fails in a BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis the remaining power supplies will provide sufficient power to operate a chassis that has all slots populated with modules Switch Connectivity and the Backplane Switch connectivity is an important aspect of the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch The MSM module is the internal switch fabric for data being sent between I O modules No configuration information is stored on the I O modules all configuration information is stored on the MSM module s Each MSM has two CPUs for protocol processing and network management For full redundancy you can install up to four
184. hen ports 2 6 10 and 14 followed by ports 3 7 11 and 15 and finally ports 4 8 12 and 16 A NOTE If congestion is detected on a port with flow control enabled a flow control PAUSE frame is sent out that port The PAUSE frame is not sent out on the other ports in the group Table 48 lists the number of GM 16X modules that you can install in an Alpine chassis Table 48 GM 16X configurations supported Chassis GM 16X Modules Alpine 3802 1 or 1 GM 16T module installed in slot 1 or slot 2 only Alpine 3804 4 Alpine 3808 8 160 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Table 49 describes the media types and the associated maximum distances for the GM 16X module Table 49 GM 16X3 media types and distances Maximum Distance Mini GBIC Type Media Type meters 1000BASE SX multimode fiber 550 1000BASE LX single mode fiber 10 000 1000BASE ZX single mode fiber 70 000 Each of the 16 ports in the GM 16X is capable of supporting up to a full gigabit of traffic with a maximum module throughput of 4 Gigabits to the Alpine backplane When a GM 16X3 is operational in an Alpine 3808 and five or more ports of ports 1 through 8 or ports 9 through 16 are simultaneously forwarding unusually high rates of small uniformly sized packets for example 64 Byte the bandwidth through each port can be lower than the expected minimum of 250 Mbps When you install and configure a GM 16X3 module
185. hese wavelengths over the single mode optical fiber Table 75 describes the specifications for the WDMi optical interface Table 75 WDMi optical interface specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transmitter Optical output power 5 dBm 3 dBm 1 dBm Channel 1 wavelength 1495 nm 1501 nm 1507 nm Channel 2 wavelength 1515 nm 1521 nm 1527 nm Channel 3 wavelength 1535 nm 1541 nm 1547 nm Channel 4 wavelength 1555 nm 1561 nm 1567 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 17 dBm Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 247 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Table 75 WDMi optical interface specifications continued Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Optical input power maximum 1 dBm Fiber Optic Cable Back reflection 25 dB Extreme Networks recommends that you reserve 3 dB for losses due to cable splices connectors and operating margin Table 76 describes the cable attenuation cable budget and operating distance for a variety of cable attentuation ratings for the WDMi module Table 76 WDMi maximum transmit distances Cable Attenuation Cable Budget Maximum Distance 0 20 dB km 9 dB 45 km 0 25 dB km 9 dB 36 km 0 30 dB km 9 dB 30 km A minimum of 2 dB attenuation is required to prevent saturation of the receiver LEDs The WDMi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Channel status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the WDMi module see I O Module LEDs on pa
186. i switch Use only Extreme Networks certified mini GBICs available from Extreme Networks into the mini GBIC port in the switch A NOTE For more information about mini GBICs see Mini GBIC Types and Specifications on page 20 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 81 Summit Switch Models Console Port Use the console port 9 pin D type connector to attach a terminal and access the CLI via a serial connection Use the console port for local management LEDs The Summit48si switch has the following LEDs e Management e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summit48si switch see Summit48si Switch LEDs on page 85 Summit48si Switch Rear View Figure 29 shows the rear view for the Summit48si switch Figure 29 Rear view of the Summit48si switch PSU status LEDs Power socket x SSS G Power supply Power supply aii Power Supplies The Summit48si switch supports two hot insert power supplies either AC shown in Figure 30 or DC shown in Figure 31 with one power supply preinstalled at the factory Extreme Networks recommends upgading to ExtremeWare v7 1 or later to use the following features e Use the show switch command to indicate the type of power supply AC or DC installed e A warning will be printed if an AC and DC power supply are installed in the same switch This is
187. iamond 6816 Fan Trays The BlackDiamond 6816 fan trays no 53013 e Contain nine individual fans e Are preinstalled at the factory e Are accessed from the front of the chassis e Are hot swappable which means you can remove and replace a fan tray without powering down the system AR CAUTION Do not cover or obstruct the fan ventilation holes at the side of the unit Doing so can result in overheating and possible damage to the BlackDiamond 6816 switch Thermal sensors will shut down the BlackDiamond 6816 switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius ExtremeWare monitors the fan trays in the BlackDiamond 6816 switch for failure and overheat conditions All fan failures and over temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch log See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for more information on switch monitoring Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 279 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Fan Tray Figure 137 BlackDiamond 6816 fan tray Turn screw heads clockwise to lock amp counter clockwise to unlock fan tray Hand grip Direction of airflow BD_031 BlackDiamond 6808 Fan Tray The BlackDiamond 6808 fan tray no 50013 e Contains three individual fans e Is preinstalled at the factory e Is accessed from the rear of the chassis e Is hot swappable which means you can remove and replace the fan tray without powering down th
188. iation mode GBIC Ports The GM 4Xi module supports the following GBICs e 1000BASE SX e 1000BASE LX e 1000BASE LX70 e ZX GBIC e LX100 GBIC e UTP GBIC GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 43 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC type Table 43 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 154 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Table 43 GBIC types and maximum distances continued Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters If you have an Alpine 3800 series
189. imum receiver 12 6 dB sensitivity Minimum extinction ratio 3 5 dB Minimum distance 10 km Wavelength range 1260 to 1355 nm Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 249 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Table 77 10GLRi optical parameters continued Parameter Value Maximum overload average 0 5 dB average power receive power Channel insertion loss 6 4 dB 1 This measurement uses the Optical Modulation Amplitude OMA test method the absolute difference between an optical power logic level one and an optical power logic level zero 2 This measurement includes the dispersive effects of the cable on the transmitter known as Transmitted Dispersion Penalty TDP Table 78 describes the power specifications for the 1OGLRi module Table 78 10GLRi power specifications Volts Amps Watts 2 5 0 0 3 3 11 36 5 17 85 LEDs The 10GLRi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the 10GLRi module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Software Requirements The 10GLRi module requires that you load ExtremeWare 7 0 or later on the switch Augmented Command The automatic interface configuration command now includes a keyword to specify the 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface To configure the automatic interface costs for 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1 Gbps and 10 Gbps interfaces use the following command config ospf metric table 10m lt cost gt 100m
190. input terminals are isolated from the ground terminals The BlackDiamond DC power supplies operate with DC input that can range from 42 to 70 V Each DC power supply requires a dedicated 60 A service The DC power supply ships with the input lugs attached to the power supply and the power supplies slide in from the front of the chassis as illustrated in Figure 99 For centralized DC power connections install only in a restricted access area 216 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply Figure 99 DC power supplies in a BlackDiamond 6808 or a BlackDiamond 6804 BD_DCpsx Table 65 describes the LED activity on the DC power supply Table 65 DC power supply LED activity LED Color Indicates DC in Green Input voltage is within range Amber Input voltage is outside of range Off Input voltage is below 12 V DC out Green All DC outputs are operational Amber One or more DC outputs have failed Off Input voltage is below 12 V Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply You need the following tools and equipment to install the BlackDiamond 6800 series power supplies e ESD p
191. install an I O module verify that it is working correctly Check the LEDs on the front panel of the I O module and use the command line interface CLI show slot lt slot number gt command to display slot specific information about the newly installed module LED Indicators When the I O module and its ports if applicable are configured and operating normally the front panel LED indicators should appear as follows e STATUS LED green blinking e DIAG LED off 274 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing I O Modules e Port status LED per port The ARM and MPLS modules do not have external network interfaces ports therefore there are no port status LEDs on those modules Green Amber blinking all except ATM and PoS modules Amber blinking returning to green ATM and PoS modules only For more information about I O module LED activity see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Displaying Slot Status Information Assuming the I O module has no problems the command show slot lt slot gt where lt slot gt is the number of the slot where you installed the module displays information about the module including general information about the module name serial number part number the state of the module power down operational mismatch between the slot configuration and the module in the slot and the status of the ports on the module If you have an ARM PoS ATM or MPLS module the comma
192. ion maintenance and removal of a power supply must be done by qualified trained service personnel only 2 If you have one AC power supply installed in the Alpine 3802 switch it must be installed in the lower power supply tray PSU A 3 If you require DC power supplies in the Alpine 3802 switch you must have two DC power supplies installed Following Safety Information A WARNING Read the safety information in Appendix A thoroughly before installing your Extreme Networks switch Failure to follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment 112 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Following Safety Information e All service to components of an Alpine 3800 series switch should be performed by trained service personnel only Service personnel are persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons A NOTE Electronic components are sensitive to static electricity ESD originating from you or from objects around you can damage these components Exercise every possible precaution to prevent ESD when working around printed circuit assemblies Keep all printed circuit assemblies in protective ESD preventive sacks or place them on antistatic mats until you are ready to install them Wear an ESD preventive wrist strap and ensure
193. ion holes at the side of the unit Doing so can result in overheating and possible damage to the BlackDiamond 6804 switch Thermal sensors will shut down the BlackDiamond 6804 switch if the internal temperature exceeds 60 degrees Celsius ExtremeWare monitors the fan trays in the BlackDiamond 6804 switch for failure and overheat conditions All fan failures and over temperature events cause the switch to send alerts to the network management station or to the switch log See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for more information on switch monitoring Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 281 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Fan Tray Figure 139 BlackDiamond 6804 fan tray Turn screw heads clockwise to lock amp counter clockwise to unlock fan tray Hand grip Direction ee OG of airflow XM_030 Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray BlackDiamond 6800 series fan trays are hot swappable You do not need to turn off power to a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch to remove a fan tray You need the following tools and equipment to remove a fan tray e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver AR CAUTION Only trained service personnel should perform service to BlackDiamond fan trays Before installing or removing any components or carrying out any maintenance procedures see Appendix A To remove a fan tray from the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 1 Attach
194. ires a BlackDiamond chassis using MSM switch fabric module s Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 243 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Use iPower power supplies part numbers 50020 50021 50022 with G16X3 modules A BlackDiamond chassis with original power supplies part number 50012 will not support a chassis fully populated with G16X3 modules Table 72 lists the number of G16X modules that you can install in a BlackDiamond chassis depending on which power supplies are installed Table 72 G16X modules supported Chassis Power Supply G16X3 Module BlackDiamond 6804 BlackDiamond 6808 BlackDiamond 6808 BlackDiamond 6816 any original power supplies iPower power supplies iPower power supplies 4 6 8 16 244 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules G24T Module Figure 119 shows the G24T module Figure 119 G24T3 module m acr Module status LEDs s Port status LEDs RJ 45 connector ports o ee S ol Ss S So Mimim my S e Egs L L L e L L L L L O G24T3 The G24T gt module has 24 1000BASE T ports using RJ 45 connectors that autonegotiate for 1OBASE T 100BASE T or 1000BASE T The G24T3 ports are oversubscribed 4 1 to the module s switch fabric The module has six groups of four ports each Each group multiple
195. is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals the operating status of the module as a whole e DIAG LED Located beside the STATUS LED This LED is a single color LED displaying in amber only that flashes amber when diagnostics are running on the module and is solid amber if the module fails the diagnostics e Port level LED Located next to the port number identifying each fiber optic network interface connector on the front panel of the module The port LED is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals the operating status of that network interface port A NOTE During the PoS module boot up the Status and Diag LEDs may be incorrectly lit to solid green or solid amber The LEDs reflect their true state after approximately 30 seconds when the module has completed its boot cycle For more information on PoS module LED activity see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Service Ports The PoS modules are equipped with two front panel service ports one port is a subminiature DB 9 connector the other is a micro HD 15 connector see Figure 129 Both ports are reserved for use only by Extreme Networks technical support personnel for diagnostic purposes 260 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Figure 129 Showing the components and LEDs of the PoS module Captive retaining screw Module status LED Module diagnostics LED
196. is serial number e The Ethernet MAC address of the switch e Symbols of safety certification Figure 92 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 6804 switch Figure 92 Rear view of the BlackDiamond 6804 switch Label Grounding studs 6804_rr Installing the Chassis The BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis fits in a standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack Table 60 displays the height measurements for the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis Table 60 BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis height measurements Switch Model Height BlackDiamond 6816 35 U BlackDiamond 6808 15 U BlackDiamond 6804 11 U The BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis comes shipped with a preinstalled fan tray For your safety due to the increased weight of the chassis after components are installed and to prevent damage to the Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 205 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis equipment Extreme Networks strongly recommends that you install the power supply and modules after you mount the chassis in a rack A NOTE Mount the chassis in a rack before installing any s
197. is the same See Table 3 for more information about the Power LED activity on switches running ExtremeWare version 6 2 or later Table 3 Power LED activity for switches running ExtremeWare version 6 2 or later LED Color Indicates Power LED Green The indicated power supply unit PSU is powered up Amber A PSU is installed but not connected to power Off The PSU is not receiving power or no PSU is present A NOTE If the information in the Release Notes that shipped with your switch differs from the information in this guide follow the Release Notes Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 19 Summary of Common Switch Features Full Duplex Support Extreme Networks switches provide full duplex support for all ports This means that frames can be transmitted and received simultaneously which in effect doubles the bandwidth that is available on a link Most ports on an Extreme Networks switch autonegotiate for half duplex or full duplex operation Gigabit Ethernet and 100BASE FX ports operate in full duplex mode only in accordance with technical standards Management Ports The 10 100BASE TX Ethernet management port allows you to communicate directly to the CPU of the switch You can plug an Ethernet cable directly from your laptop into the management port This provides you with direct access into the switch and allows you to view and locally manage the switch configurations Do not assign an in band IP address to the ma
198. is up Amber Packet activity is occurring For more information about MSM module LED activity see MSM LEDs on page 231 Removing MSMs The BlackDiamond MSM module is hot swappable You do not need to power off the system to remove a module You need the following tools and equipment to remove an MSM module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement MSM module To remove an MSM module 1 Attach an ESD strap to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel 2 To loosen the module unscrew the screws with a 1 Phillips screwdriver 3 Simultaneously rotate the ejector injector levers outward to disengage the module from the backplane a Grasp the module front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the metal panel to support the weight of the module AR CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors b Slide the module out of the chassis and place it immediately into an antistatic sack to protect it from ESD damage and to prevent dust from collecting on the module s connectors 4 If you are going to install a replacement MSM follow the installation procedure described on page 231 5 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to han
199. ists the groups for the G16X module Table 70 G16X port groups Ports Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AON Oa Ff WD Populate ports 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 and 15 then port 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 and 16 242 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules A NOTE If congestion is detected on a port with flow control enabled a flow control PAUSE frame is sent out that port The PAUSE frame is not sent out on the other port in the group Table 71 describes the media types and the associated maximum distances for the GM 16X module Table 71 G16X media types and distances Maximum Distance Mini GBIC Type Media Type meters 1000BASE SX multimode fiber 550 1000BASE LX single mode fiber 10 000 1000BASE ZX single mode fiber 70 000 Mini GBIC Ports The G16X3 module supports any of the following mini GBICS e SX mini GBIC e LX mini GBIC e ZX mini GBIC A NOTE For more information about the supported mini GBIC types see Mini GBIC Types and Specifications on page 20 LEDs The G16X module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status e Diagnostics For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G16X module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Software Requirements The G16X module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 7 0 1b11 or later and BootROM 7 8 or later on the switch Hardware Requirements The G16X requ
200. it Switch Models Summary of Features way 1 Summit series switches Summit 200 Series Memory Requirements Port Connections Following Safety Information Summit Switch Models Switch Models Summitli Switch Front View GBIC Ports LEDs Summitli Switch Rear View Power Sockets Label 36 36 36 36 36 36 45 47 47 48 48 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 55 59 60 60 61 62 62 63 65 66 66 67 68 68 68 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Reset Button Console Port Summit5i Switch Front View GBIC Ports LEDs Summit5i Switch Rear View Power Sockets Label Reset Button Console Port Management Port Summit7i Switch Front View GBIC Ports LEDs Reset Button Console Port Modem Port Management Port PCMCIA Slot Summit7i Switch Rear View Power Sockets Label Summitli Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i Switch LEDs Summit48i Switch Front View GBIC Ports LEDs Summit48i Switch Rear View Power Sockets Label Reset Button Console Port Summit48si Switch Front View Mini GBIC Ports Console Port LEDs Summit48si Switch Rear View Power Supplies Reset Button Summit48si Power Supply LEDs Summit48si Switch Bottom View Labels Summit48si Switch LEDs 68 68 69 70 71 71 71 72 72 72 72 73 74 75 75 75 76 76 76 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 80 80 80 80 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 Extreme Networks Consolidated
201. it switch rack installation Summit switch rack removal 323 304 328 330 326 325 325 315 315 314 314 316 320 320 320 311 311 311 313 329 319 327 310 322 318 317 317 39 125 128 131 137 186 185 131 137 186 185 180 182 206 210 217 273 231 235 147 148 104 U uninstalling rack Alpine 3802 chassis Alpine 3804 chassis Alpine 3808 chassis BlackDiamond 6804 chassis BlackDiamond 6808 chassis BlackDiamond 6816 chassis Summit switch uninterruptable power supply calculating amperage requirements features selecting transition time UPS See uninterruptable power supply UTP GBIC requirements Ww WDMi module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight weight 10GLRi module ARM module ATM module BlackDiamond 6804 switch BlackDiamond 6808 switch BlackDiamond 6816 switch F32Fi module F48Ti module F96Ti module FM 24MFi module FM 24SFi module FM 24Ti module FM 32Ti module FM 8Vi module G12SXi module G16X3 module G24T3 module G8Ti module G8Xi module GM 16T3 module GM 16X3 module GM 4Si module GM 4Ti module GM 4Xi module GM WDMi module MPLS module MSM PoS module SMMi module Summit i series switch WDMi module WM 1T3i module WM 4E1i module WM 4T1i module wiring closet airflow requirements BlackDiamond 6816 switch installation electrostatic discharge 128 128 128 210 210 210 104 27 247 322 322 322 322 322
202. ith MT RJ connectors and 4 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors e 12 1000BASE LX ports with either MT RJ or LC connectors Figure 20 shows LC connectors and 4 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors To determine the type of connectors on your Summit5iLX switch look at the serial number on the rear of the switch Serial numbers that start with 0233 and lower have MT RJ connectors Serial numbers that start with 0234 and higher have LC connectors For example a Summit5iLX switch with the serial number 0234M 00012 has LC connectors Figure 18 Front view of the Summit5i switch with 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports 100 1000 Mbps ports Unit status LEDs OBASET 56d 2 i i F CEE aise 9 10 11 12 990 acer wiry 1000BASE x GREI oK 13 14 15 16 pi ato 20000060 E Li Li 00000000 Port status LEDs Gigabit Ethernet ports ___ aSr Figure 19 Front view of the Summit5i switch with 1000BASE SX ports 1000 Mbps ports Unit status LEDs BASEX D PSUA 13 14 15 16 ie Suen oo T o O manr Lord 0 0 o ort status LEDs _________ Gigabit Ethernet ports SHG_S5SX Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 69 Summit Swit
203. itti Summit5i Summit48i Power One supplies 75 to 80 C 167 to 176 F Summit 7i Martek supplies 75 C 167 F Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 301 Switch Technical Specifications Table 90 Summit 200 series switch specifications Physical Dimensions Summit 200 24 Height 1 75 inches 4 44 cm Width 17 3 inches 43 94 cm Depth 8 1 inches 20 57 cm Weight 5 72 lbs 2 6 kg Summit 200 48 Height 1 75 inches 4 44 cm Width 17 3 inches 43 94 cm Depth 12 2 inches 31 00 cm Weight 9 7 lbs 4 4 kg Safety Certifications and Standards UL 60950 3rd Edition listed CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 Low Voltage Directive LVD TUV R GS Mark by German Notified Body EN60950 2000 CB Scheme IEC60950 2000 with all country deviations Mexico NOM NYCE Product Safety and EMC Approval Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3260 ACA DoC Safety of ITE S Mark Argentina GOST Russia Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility EMI EMC Certifications and Standards FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A US Emissions ICES 003 Class A Canada Emissions 89 336 EEC EMC Directive ETSI EN 300 386 2001 EU Telecommunications Emissions and Immunity EN55022 1998 Class A European Emissions EN55024 1998 includes IEC 61000 3 4 5 6 11 European Immunity EN61000 3 2 3 Europe Harmonics and Flicker IEC CISPR 22 1997 Class A International Emissions IEC CISPR 24 1998 International I
204. ity on the Alpine I O modules with the green stripe for example the GM 4Ti GM 4Xi and FM 24MFi I O modules Table 57 describes the LED activity on the Alpine Access I O modules with the silver stripe for example the WM 4T1i WM 4E1i and WM 1T3i I O modules Table 58 describes the LED activity on the Alpine PoE modules for example the FM32Pi I O module Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 177 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules Table 56 Alpine I O module LEDs green stripe LED Color Indicates Status Green Normal operation Amber Disabled Off No power Port Green Link up all except Flashing green Disabled EM34Shi and amber Packet activity Off Link down Port Green Link up FM 24MFi and FM 24SFi only Flashing green Off Packet activity Link down Table 57 Alpine Access I O module LEDs silver stripe LED Color Indicates Status Off No power Amber Module seated in chassis Green Module powered up Diag Green blinking Power on Self Test POST is running Off Normal operation WAN port Amber Near end fault has been detected for example no 1 4 T1 E1 cable 1 T3 Amber rapidly blinking2 Amber slowly blinking Green Alternating green and amber Green rapidly blinking2 Green slowly blinking 10 100 port Off 5 6 T1 E1 2 3 T3 Green Alternating green and amber 1 The Diag LED is on the WM 4T1i module only 2 The rapidly blinking LEDs cycle twice a second 3 The slowly blinking LEDs
205. iwan VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia Environmental EN ETSI 300 019 2 1 2000 class 1 2 EN ETSI 300 019 2 2 1999 class 2 3 EN ETSI 300 019 2 2 1999 class 3 1e ASTM D5276 ASTM D3580 ASTM D3332 312 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine Modules Table 97 GM WDMi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 4 lbs 1 8 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecomm
206. kDiamond 6804 are powered on The BlackDiamond switch does not support installing a combination of the old 220 VAC PSUs part number 50012 with the new iPower 220 VAC PSUs part number 50021 in the same chassis The 220 VAC power supply ships with one L6 20P locking power cable 220 VAC power supplies slide in from the front of the chassis as illustrated in Figure 97 214 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Figure 97 220 VAC power supplies in a BlackDiamond 6808 or a BlackDiamond 6804 g 6 BD_028 Table 63 describes the LED activity on the 220 VAC power supply Table 63 LEDs on the 220 VAC power supply LED Color Indicates AC In Green Input voltage is 220 V Amber Input voltage is less than 180 V Off No input power DC Out Green All DC outputs are operational Amber One or more DC outputs have failed Off No power 110 VAC Power Supplies The BlackDiamond 110 VAC power supply has two IEC 320 C19 inputs on the front of the power supply Both power cords must be connected for the power supply to operate properly and both power cords require a dedicated 20 A 110 VAC source power connection The 110 VAC power supply ships with two L
207. l 10 A service receptacle CEE 7 7 for 110 220 VAC power supplies Alpine Summit Australia 10 A service receptacle AS 3112 for 110 220 VAC power supplies Alpine Summit Japan 15 A service receptacle JIS 8303 for 110 220 VAC power supplies Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 37 Site Preparation Table 16 AC power requirements continued Switch Type Country Requirements BlackDiamond North America 20 A service receptacle NEMA L6 20 locking for BlackDiamond 110 VAC power supplies BlackDiamond North America 20 A service receptacle NEMA L6 20 locking for BlackDiamond 220 VAC power supplies BlackDiamond International 16 A 20 A service receptacle IEC 60309 for BlackDiamond 220 VAC power supplies BlackDiamond North America 20 A service receptacle NEMA 5 20 non locking for BlackDiamond 110 VAC power supplies BlackDimamond_ North America 20 A service receptacle NEMA 6 20 non locking for BlackDiamond 220 VAC power supplies BlackDiamond International 16 A service receptacle CEE 7 7 for BlackDiamond 220 VAC power supplies BlackDiamond Australia 15 A service receptacle 036 for BlackDiamond 220 VAC power supplies e Use appropriate DC power for your switch as described in Table 17 Table 17 DC power requirements Switch Type Country Requirements Alpine International Use 30 A at 40 VDC or equivalent power between 40 and 70 VDC for Alpine DC power supplies For Alpine DC p
208. l end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 If there is a blank faceplate covering the power supply bay remove it and save it for future use 3 Prepare the power supply for installation e Use the text on the front of the power supply to ensure that it is oriented correctly for either the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 e Move the safety latch to the remove position e Open the ejector injector lever as shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59 AR CAUTION When you insert a power supply use one hand to support the power supply from the bottom and the other hand to hold the central handle on the front of the power supply Do not use just the ejector injector lever to insert a power supply 4 Use the central handle to guide the power supply into the power supply bay while supporting the supply from the bottom with your other hand Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 131 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies Figure 58 AC power supply for the Alpine 3808 switch O O Ejector oO injector Safety lever Handle latch 0 O O O smo WHEN INSTALLED IN 3808 THIS WAY UP dN AVM SIHL POSE NI GATIVLSNI NIHM ESD wrist strap connector O 38_pwrx8 Ejector injector Handle lever O WHEN INSTALLED IN 3804 THIS WAY UP df AVM SIHL 808 NI
209. l ports for ingress rate shaping Internal loopback ports are marked with the notation iL when displayed on the command line or with ExtremeWare Vista Web access The WM 4T1i module supports T1 and autonegotiation of 1OBASE T and 100BASE T The default configuration of the WM 4Ti module is as follows e The four T1 ports allow 1 54 Mbps and the other two ports in autonegotiation mode allow 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and full duplex or half duplex operation AA WARNING To reduce the risk of fire use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord You must ground the Alpine 3800 series chassis to ensure safe operation of the WM 4T1i module For information about grounding requirements for the Alpine 3800 series chassis see Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis on page 127 LEDs The WM 4T1i module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the WM 4T1i module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The WM 4T1i module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 5 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later on your switch For more information about software requirements and WM 4T1i module configuration see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 175 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules WM 4E1i Module Figure 83 shows the WM 4E1i module Figure 83 W
210. lackDiamond 6804 Switch Front View The BlackDiamond 6804 switch consists of the following components e One 6 slot chassis with backplane e Four I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 4 e Two MSM64i slots labeled slots A and B e Two power supply bays accessed from the front of the unit e One fan tray accessed from the front of the unit e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector The BlackDiamond 6804 switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of port configurations e 384 switched 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet ports Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 203 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis 128 switched 100BASE FX Fast Ethernet ports 48 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports 64 switched 1000BASE X oversubscribed ports 96 switched 10 100 1000BASE T oversubscribed ports 12 OC3 PoS ports 12 OC3 ATM ports 6 OC12 PoS ports A NOTE PoS and ATM modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet VO module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly Figure 91 shows the front view of the BlackDiamond 6804 chassis installed with two MSMs and four 0 ptional I O modules Figure 91 Front view of the BlackDiamond 6804 switch with sample I O modules
211. later on the switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 257 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules P3cSi P3cMi P12cSi and P12cMi Modules Figure 127 shows the P3cSi and P3cMi modules Figure 127 P3cSi and P3cMi modules P8es Module status LEDs 00 00 EB zB Port Port status g status LEDs o Network LEDs H interface m ports E E 000 000 000 i Service ports BD_P3 Figure 128 shows the P12cSi and P12cMi modules Figure 128 P12cSi and P12cMi modules o Module status LEDs fe E B Jean 0 J Port 0 Port status 00 m status LEDs Network LEDs interface i ports 0 U Service ports BD_P12 The P3cSi and P3cMi Packet over SONET PoS modules each have four OC 3 ports that use duplex SC connectors The P12cSi and P12cMi PoS modules each have two OC 12 ports that use duplex SC connectors The P3cSi and the P12cSi modules support single mode fiber optic cable only and the P3cMi and the P12cMi modules support multimode fiber optic cable only These modules connect the switch to a SONET infrastructure that is used by metropolitan area service providers and operators of server co location networks 258 Extre
212. le s connectors 4 To install a replacement SMMi follow the installation procedure described on page 147 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 149 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module 150 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules This chapter describes e Configuring I O Modules on page 151 e Installing I O Modules on page 180 e Removing I O Modules on page 182 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any Alpine I O modules Alpine I O modules consist of a printed circuit board mounted on a metal panel that acts as the insertion vehicle in an Alpine 3800 series switch The module carrier also includes ejector injector levers and captive retaining screws at each end of the module front panel For more information about Alpine I O module specifications see Appendix C Module Technical Specifications Configuring I O Modules No configuration information is stored on the I O modules configuration information is stored on the SMMi for the Alpine 3808 and 3804 chassis and the integrated Switch Management Module in the Alpine 3802 chassis A NOTE There is a slight difference in appearance between Alpine I O modules Alpine Ethernet I O modules have a green stripe
213. le supports the 10GLRi module Switch Components The BlackDiamond 6816 chassis the BlackDiamond 6808 chassis and the BlackDiamond 6804 chassis use the same I O modules management modules and power supplies but they use different fan trays The BlackDiamond 6816 chassis only supports modules and power supplies with an i in their name such as the MSM64i BlackDiamond 6816 Switch The BlackDiamond 6816 switch consists of the following components e One 20 slot chassis with backplane e 16 I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 16 e Four MSM64i slots labeled slots A through D e Four power supply bays accessed from the front of the unit e Two fan trays accessed from the front of the unit e Two side mounted handles for lifting the chassis e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector A NOTE The BlackDiamond 6816 chassis only supports modules with an i or 3 in their name such as the G16X3 and power supplies with an i in their name such as the ipower 220 VAC Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 193 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Overview BlackDiamond 6808 Switch The BlackDiamond 6808 switch consists of the following components e One 10 slot chassis with backplane e Eight I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 8 e Two MSM64i slots labeled slots A and B e Two power supply bays accessed from the front of the unit e One fan tray accessed from the rear of t
214. led Slot 3 is disabled Slots 1 and 2 support all existing Alpine modules Alpine Ethernet I O modules green stripe and Alpine Access I O modules silver stripe e Auto The switch determines if it is in standard or extended mode depending on the type of modules installed in the chassis or the slot preconfigurations To configure the switch to operate in a specific mode use the command configure switch auto extended standard By default the switch operates in auto mode 120 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A NOTE Alpine 3800 Series Architecture Slot 3 in the Alpine 3802 accepts only Alpine Access I O modules silver stripe You cannot insert an Alpine Ethernet I O module green stripe into slot 3 For more information about this command see the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide and the ExtremeWare Software User Guide Alpine 3802 Switch LEDs Table 35 describes the LED activity of the Alpine 3802 switch Table 35 Alpine 3802 switch LEDs LED Color Indicates DIAG Green blinking Power on Self Test POST is running Off Normal operation STATUS Green blinking Normal operation Yellow blinking Critical error fan failure or over temperature Off Unit is not receiving power PSU A PSU B Green Normal operation Amber PSU failure Off PSU not present or not powered EXTENDED MODE Green Extended mode operation Off Not operating in extended mode STANDARD MODE Green Standard mode operation Off Not opera
215. lor Indicates PSU A PSU B Green Normal operation Amber DC output failure Off PSU not present or not powered 130 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply This section describes how to install an AC power supply for either the Alpine 3808 or the Alpine 3804 switch The Alpine 3802 switch power supply is preinstalled at the factory For centralized DC power connections install only in a restricted access area A NOTE Ground the rack mount the chassis in a rack and ground the chassis before installing any switch components Complete the following tasks before installing any switch components e Ground the rack For more information about grounding the rack see Protective Grounding for the Rack on page 46 e Mount the chassis in a rack For more information about mounting the chassis see Installing the Chassis on page 124 e Ground the chassis For more information about grounding the chassis see Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis on page 127 You need the following tools and equipment to install the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC power supplies e ESD preventive wrist strap e 2 Phillips screwdriver e AC power supply To install the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC power supplies 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the meta
216. low requirements Alpine 3802 switch certification marks checking the installation AC checking the installation DC configure switch command DC cabling dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental requirements fan tray front view heat dissipation installing the chassis LEDs MAC address mode of operation power supply specifications powering on rear view AC rear view DC removing the chassis from a rack serial number telecommunications standard Alpine 3804 switch AC power supply certification marks checking the installation 122 122 249 323 323 323 323 323 99 304 306 300 302 39 308 135 143 120 142 304 304 308 184 120 305 125 121 123 120 305 135 122 123 128 123 304 131 308 140 checking the installation AC DC cabling DC power supply dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental requirements fan tray front view heat dissipation installing the chassis MAC address power supply specifications powering on AC rear view removing the chassis from a rack serial number SMMi description telecommunications standard Alpine 3808 switch AC power supply certification marks checking the installation AC checking the installation DC DC cabling DC power supply dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental requirements fan tray front view heat dissipation installing the chassis MAC address power supply specificati
217. lt user name admin to log on with administrator privileges For example login admin Administrator capabilities allow you to access all switch functions A NOTE For more information about logging in to the switch and configuring switch management access see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide 4 At the password prompt press Return This is because the default user name admin has no password assigned to it When you have successfully logged on to the system the command line prompt displays the system name for example BlackDiamond6 800 gt in its prompt A NOTE For more information about how to make a specific system name see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide 5 Assign an IP address and subnetwork mask for VLAN default by typing config vlan default ipaddress 123 45 67 8 255 255 255 0 Your changes take effect immediately 6 Save your configuration changes so that they will be in effect after the next system reboot by typing save The configuration is saved to the configuration database of the SMMi modules in the Alpine switch and both MSMs in the BlackDiamond switch A NOTE For more information about saving configuration changes see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide 7 When you are finished with these tasks log out of the switch by typing logout Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 291 Initial Switch and Management Access 292 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide
218. ly in a temperature and humidity controlled indoor area that is free of airborne materials that can conduct electricity Too much humidity can cause a fire Too little humidity can produce electrical shock and fire The following are some general thermal recommendations for your wiring closet e Ensure that the ventilation in the wiring closet is adequate to maintain a temperature below 104 F 40 C e Install a reliable air conditioning and ventilation system e Keep the ventilation in the wiring closet running during nonbusiness hours otherwise the equipment can overheat e Maintain ambient operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C e Maintain storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C A NOTE Like all electrical equipment product lifetimes degrade with increased temperature If possible temperatures should be kept at approximately 78 F 25 C or lower BlackDiamond 6816 Spacing Requirements Due to chassis to chassis heating Extreme Networks recommends placing no more than three BlackDiamond 6816 chassis next to each other The following are some general recommendations for installing your BlackDiamond 6816 chassis e A minimum of 17 32 inches 44 cm between each set of three BlackDiamond 6816 chassis Or e Place front back cooled equipment such as a BlackDiamond 6808 chassis between each set of three BlackDiamond 6816 chassis Or e Place patch panels which are used to patch cables t
219. me Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules In the first application the metropolitan area network service provider can build service network sites in various cities then use PoS modules in a BlackDiamond 6800 series switch to connect those cities to a carrier s SONET infrastructure In the second application operators of server co location networks can use PoS modules in BlackDiamond 6800 series switches to create a SONET based connection between server co location sites The result is that their network is simpler to manage and problems can be isolated and resolved more expediently Extreme Networks offers the PoS module in the following configurations e P3cMi four OC 3 multimode short reach optical interfaces e P3cSi four OC 3 single mode intermediate reach optical interfaces e P12cMi two OC 12 multimode short reach optical interfaces e P12cSi two OC 12 single mode intermediate reach optical interfaces A NOTE The c in the names of the modules indicates that the optical interfaces on these modules operate in concatenated mode which enables all the bandwidth to be devoted to a single payload stream A NOTE PoS modules are a Class 1 laser device The default configuration of the P3cSi P3cMi P12cSi and P12cMi modules is as follows e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged For P3c modules only ports 1 and 3 are added to the default VLAN Ports 2 and 4 are not added to any VLAN
220. mmit7i switch space requirements for the rack standards cabling commercial building grounding Summit 200 24 switch agency certifications console port dimensions electromagnetic compatibility front view heat dissipation laser safety LEDs MAC address port connections power socket power supply specifications power off specifications rear view serial number Summit 200 48 switch agency certifications console port dimensions electromagnetic compatibility front view heat dissipation laser safety LEDs MAC address 234 146 340 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide port connections 89 front view 81 power socket 90 heat dissipation 300 power supply 303 LEDs 77 85 power off specifications 303 MAC address 85 rear view 90 mini GBIC support 81 serial number 91 port configurations 81 Summit switch general power supply 82 checking the installation 97 power supply specifications 301 features 60 rear view 82 models 59 65 reset button 83 port connections 62 serial number 85 powering on 96 Summit5i switch rack mounting 93 agency certifications 300 removing the switch from a rack 104 certification marks 308 stacking with other devices 97 console port location 71 Summitli switch dimensions 299 agency certifications 300 electromagnetic compatibility 300 certification marks 308 environmental requirements 308 console port location 68 front view 69 dimensions 299 GBIC support 70 electromagnetic compatibility 300 heat dissi
221. mmunity IEC EN 61000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC EN 61000 4 3 Radiated Immunity IEC EN 61000 4 4 Transient Bursts IEC EN 61000 4 5 Surge IEC EN 61000 4 6 Conducted Immunity IEC EN 61000 4 11 Power Dips and Interruptions Japan Class A VCCI Registration Emissions Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3548 ACA DoC Emissions Korean MIC Mark MIC Approval Emissions and Immunity Mexico NOM NYCE Product Safety and EMC Approval GOST Russia Taiwan CNS 13438 1997 Class A BSMI Approval Emissions Laser Safety North America Europe FCC 21 CFR subpart J Safety of Laser Products CDRH Letter of Approval US FDA Approval EN60825 2 European Safety of Lasers 302 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Heat Dissipation Summit 200 24 24 1 W maximum 82 BTU hr maximum Summit 200 48 48 0 W maximum 164 BTU hr maximum Power Supply AC Line Frequency Input Voltage Options Current Rating 50 Hz to 60 Hz 90 VAC to 264 VAC auto ranging 100 120 VAC 2 0 A 200 240 VAC 1 0A Switch Power Off Temperature power off Listed by supply type Digital supplies not Rev C1 Not drifting 65 to 70 C 149 to 158 F Drifting 50 C 122 F Digital supplies Rev C1 70 to 75 C 158 to 167 F Power One supplies Rev OL and earlier 60 to 65 C 140 to 149 F Power One supplies Rev OM and later 75 C 167 F Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide
222. mum distance of 10 000 meters GBIC Specifications Table 8 through Table 14 describe the specifications for each GBIC type Table 8 1000BASE SX specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 9 5 dBm 4 dBm Center wavelength 830 nm 850 nm 860 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 17 dBm Optical input power maximum 0 dBm Operating wavelength 830 nm 860 nm Table 9 100BASE LX specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 11 dBm 3 dBm Center wavelength 1270 nm 1310 nm 1355 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 19 dBm Optical input power maximum 3 dBm Operating wavelength 1270 nm 1355 nm Table 10 ZX GBIC specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 4 dBm 3 dBm 1 dBm Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 25 Summary of Common Switch Features Table 10 ZX GBIC specifications continued Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Center wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 23 5 dBm Optical input power maximum 1 dBm Operating wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm Table 11 ZX GBIC Rev 03 specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 2 dBm 0 dBm 2 dBm Center wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 23 dBm Optical input power maximum 1 dBm Operating wavele
223. n Port is operating at 1000 Mbps Off Port is operating at 100 Mbps 10 100 Management Port LED Summit5i and Summit7i Green Link is present Amber Frames are being transmitted Off Link is not present Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 77 Summit Switch Models Summit48i Switch Front View The Summit48i switch is 2U in height and has 48 autosensing 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports and 4 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors Figure 25 shows the front view of the Summit48i switch Figure 25 Front view of the Summit48i switch Gigabit Ethernet ports Unit status LEDs STH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I l ms gt E e a e e TETE EEE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ss TET PERE eee OLLIE 39 41 42 43 44 45 48 Port status LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports Sait GBIC Ports The Summit48i switch has two Gigabit Ethernet ports and two redundant Gigabit Ethernet ports All of the Gigabit Ethernet ports use SC connectors You can use the following GBICs in the Summit48i switch e 1000BASE SX e 1000BASE LX e 1000BASE LX70 e ZX GBIC e LX100 e UTP GBIC 78 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit48i Switch Front View GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 25 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC typ
224. nagement port VLAN The management port VLAN is an out of band VLAN so if it is assigned an in band IP address an address where the source and destination are in the same subnet the switch will treat it as a normal VLAN and attempt to route traffic through it The management port is located on the following Extreme Networks devices e Summit5i The management port is located on the back side of the switch e Summit7i The management port is located on the front side of the switch e Alpine Switch Management Module SMMi for the Alpine series switch e BlackDiamond Management Switch Fabric Module MSM64i for the BlackDiamond series switch Extreme Networks does not recommend that you use the management port to route traffic to any front panel port on the switch The management port is designed for switch management purposes Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support The Summit48si and Summit series switches the BlackDiamond G16X module and the Alpine GM 16X module support the small form pluggable SFP GBIC also known as the mini GBIC The switches and the modules identify the type of mini GBIC that is installed and verifies that the mini GBIC is an Extreme Networks certified mini GBIC Mini GBIC Types and Specifications There are three types of mini GBIC interfaces e SX mini GBIC which conforms to the 1000BASE SX standard e LX mini GBIC which conforms to the 1000BASE LX standard e ZX mini GBIC which conforms to the IEEE 80
225. nce of the device UPS Features A UPS traditionally can perform the following functions e Absorb relatively small power surges e Smooth out noisy power sources e Continue to provide power to equipment during line sags e Provide power for some time after a blackout has occurred In addition some UPS or UPS plus software combinations provide the following functions e Automatic shutdown of equipment during long power outages e Monitoring and logging of power supply status e Display the voltage current draw of the equipment e Restart equipment after a long power outage e Display the voltage currently on the line e Provide alarms on certain error conditions e Provide short circuit protection Selecting a UPS To determine UPS requirements for your switch ask these questions e What are the amperage requirements e What is the longest potential time period that the UPS would be required to supply backup power e Where will the UPS be installed e What is the maximum transition time that your installation will allow 54 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Applicable Industry Standards A NOTE Extreme Networks recommends that you use a UPS that provides online protection Calculating Amperage Requirements To determine the size of UPS that you need use the following procedure 1 To find VA Volt Amps locate the voltage and amperage requirements for each piece of equipment These numbers ar
226. nches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 5 25 lbs 2 38 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 327 Module Technical Specifications Table 112 ARM module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 5 25 lbs 2 38 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accesso
227. nd show slot lt slot gt also displays that ExtremeWare has detected the module and set it to the OPERATIONAL state As the module progresses through its initialization the GPP subsystem state changes to OPERATIONAL and then each of the network processors state changes to OPERATIONAL For more information about slot status information see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Removing I O Modules All BlackDiamond I O modules are hot swappable You do not need to power off the system to remove a module Complete the action of removing a BlackDiamond I O module in a reasonable time frame Be sure to remove the module completely to avoid partial insertion or connection of backplane connectors A NOTE If you remove a BlackDiamond I O module during traffic flow to the module several error messages might be written to the log immediately following These messages should cease to occur after 10 seconds Under this circumstance the error messages can be safely ignored The error messages might contain one or more of the following 04 13 1999 17 18 46 lt DBUG KERN gt killPacket HW pqmWaitRx failed 04 13 1999 17 18 46 lt DBUG KERN gt pqmWaitKill failed Card 1 is removed You need the following tools and equipment to remove an I O module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement I O module or blank faceplate if you are not replacing the I O module To remove an
228. ndard MT RJ connectors and supports 1000BASE SX only The default configuration of the G12SXi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in auto negotiation mode LEDs The G12SXi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G12SXi module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Software Requirements The G12SXi module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 4 or later on the switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 241 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules G16X3 Module Figure 118 shows the G16X module Figure 118 G16X3 module Module status LEDS eaex Port status LEDs E ia Mini GBIC ports Ea Ge Bel GS Ge ea ea Be ea ea ea Bl GS ea ea gt c gt c c gt c 2922222022 pt r G16X3 The G16X3 module has 16 1000BASE X ports using mini GBIC or small form factor pluggable SFP slots The G16X ports are oversubscribed to the module s switch fabric The module has eight groups of two ports each Each group multiplexes traffic into a single full duplex gigabit link to the switch fabric To take advantage of this architecture use a single port in each group before using all of the ports in any particular group Table 70 l
229. nded as well as those that are recommended Figure 14 RJ 45 connector jacket types J iY J Not recommended Better Best SPG_001 Radio Frequency Interference If you use unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling in an installation take precautions to avoid radio frequency RF interference RF interference can cause degradation of signal quality and in an Ethernet Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 51 Site Preparation network environment can cause excessive collisions loss of link status or other physical layer problems that can lead to poor performance or loss of communication To prevent RF interference avoid the following devices or situations e Attaching UTP cable to AC power cables e Routing UTP cable near antennas such as a Ham radio antenna e Routing UTP cable near equipment that could exhibit RF interference such as ARC welding equipment Electrical motors that contain coils Air conditioner units Electrical transformers In areas or applications where these situations cannot be avoided use fiber optic cabling or shielded twisted pair cabling STP A NOTE Because harmonics can appear on the neutral line of a typical three phase power circuit Extreme Networks recommends using a harmonics meter in new installations
230. ne Modules Table 99 FM 24SFi and FM 24MFi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 4 lbs 1 8 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 315 Module Technical Specifications Table 100 FM 8Vi module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches
231. netting e DHCP BOOTP relay e RIP version 1 and RIP version 2 e OSPF routing protocol e IPX routing including RIP and SAP e Wire speed IP multicast routing support e Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP and IGMP snooping e DVMRP e IGMP snooping to control IP multicast traffic e Console RS 232 CLI connection e Telnet CLI connection e ExtremeWare VistaWeb based management interface e SNMP support e Dedicated 1OBASE T 100BASE TX port for out of band management via CLI ExtremeWare Vista or SNMP Port Connections The Alpine 3800 series switches support the following port configurations that are available on the different Alpine I O modules as described in Table 33 A CAUTION Modules that use SX LX and LX70 interfaces contain Class 1 laser devices Invisible laser radiation can occur when open Avoid direct eye exposure to beam Table 33 Port configurations available on Alpine I O modules Ethernet Ports 10BASE T 100BASE TX Module 100BASE TX 1000BASE T GBIC 1000BASE SX 100BASE FX OTHER GM 4Ti 4 GM 4Xi 41 GM 4Si 4 GM WDMi 1 WDM 2 GM 16X 16 Mini GBIC GM 16T 164 FM 32Ti 32 FM 24Ti 24 110 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Switch Components Table 33 Port configurations available on Alpine I O modules continued Ethernet Ports 10BASE T 100BASE TX Module 100BASE TX 1000BASE T GBIC 1000BASE SX 100BASE FX OTHER FM 24SFi 24 FM 24MFi 24 FM 8Vi 8 VDSLS5 WN 4T1i 2 471 WM 4E1i 2
232. ng DC power supply Alpine 3808 switch installing AC power supply installing DC power supply removing AC power supply removing DC power supply BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 110 VAC 220 VAC 48 VDC installing LEDs removing Summit 5i switch Summitli switch Summit48i switch Summit48si switch Summit7i switch power supply specifications Alpine 3802 switch Alpine 3804 switch Alpine 3808 switch BlackDiamond 6800 series switch Summit 200 series switch Summitli switch Summit48si switch Summit5i switch Summit7i switch powering on the switch Alpine 3802 Alpine 3804 AC Alpine 3808 AC BlackDiamond 6800 series Summit power of specifications Summit48i switch power off specifications Alpine 3800 series switch BlackDiamond 6800 series switch Summit 200 series switch Summitli switch Summit5i switch Summit7i switch power on self test POST Alpine 3802 switch AC power Alpine 3802 switch DC Alpine 3804 switch AC power Alpine 3804 switch DC power 215 216 301 130 112 131 137 134 141 131 305 305 305 307 303 300 301 300 300 135 133 133 220 301 305 307 303 301 301 301 135 143 133 140 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 339 R Alpine 3808 switch AC power Alpine 3808 switch DC power BlackDiamond 6800 series switch Summit switch rack specifications grounding mechanical recommendations mounting holes securing to floor space requirements rack
233. ng normally the front panel LED indicators appear as follows e STATUS LED green blinking e DIAG LED off e PSU A B or both LEDs green For more information about SMMi module LED activity see SMMi LEDs on page 146 Removing SMMi Modules All Alpine 3800 series modules GMMi and I O modules are hot swappable You do not need to power off the system to remove a module You need the following tools and equipment to remove an SMMi module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement SMMi module To remove an SMMi module 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two captive screws 3 Simultaneously rotate the ejector injector levers away from the center of the module to disengage the module from the backplane 148 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing SMMi Modules a Grasp the module front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the metal panel to support the module AR CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors b Slide the module out of the chassis and place it immediately into an antistatic sack to protect it from ESD damage and to prevent dust from collecting on the modu
234. ng on the model The airflow of the Alpine 3808 moves through the power supplies and is independent of the airflow through the chassis as shown in Figure 4 For example if the power supply fans fail the airflow through the module area of the chassis will not cool down the power supplies e Airflow for cooling power supplies enters the top of the chassis and moves left to right as you face the chassis e Airflow for cooling modules moves left to right as you face the chassis Figure 4 Airflow through the Alpine 3808 chassis Airflow through power supplies oO lo 9 Airflow u at ri ies through lo chassis E W i Aline QQIOS Preme d Ola m 9 ny Airflow le ol He through nt h i chassis ig ol m o ra m m m e OIS _ a2 are The airflow of the Alpine 3804 and Alpine 3802 moves from the left side of the chassis to the right side of the chassis as shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6 e Airflow for cooling power supplies moves left to right as you face the chassis e Airflow for cooling modules moves left to right as you face the chassis 40 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Figure 5 Airflow through the Alpine 3804 chassis
235. ngth 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm Identifying ZX GBIC Rev 03 Modules To identify the type of ZX GBIC module you have look at the label on the top of the ZX GBIC module If you see one of the following on the label you have a ZX GBIC Rev 03 module e DVA 1203 sticker near the top of the label that covers the Extreme Networks logo e ZX GBIC 1203 text near the top of the label e ZX GBIC Rev 03 text near the center of the label Table 12 LX70 GBIC specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 0 dBm 3 dBm 5 2 dBm Center wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm 1570 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 22 dBm Optical input power maximum 3 dBm Operating wavelength 1270 nm 1570 nm 26 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support Table 13 LX100 GBIC specifications Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Transceiver Optical output power 1 dBm 3 dBm 5 dBm Center wavelength 1546 nm 1551 nm 1557 nm Receiver Optical input power sensitivity 29 dBm Optical input power maximum 7 dBm Operating wavelength 1546 nm 1551 nm 1557 nm Requirements for the LX100 GBIC This section describes the requirements for the LX100 GBIC Read the information in this section before you install an LX100 GBIC If you have an Alpine 3800 series switch populated with a GM 4Xi module do one of the following e Install a maximum of three LX100 GBICs per GM 4Xi module the fourth
236. nsolidated Hardware Guide Summit1i Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i Switch LEDs Label The label on the rear of the Summit7i switch displays important information about your switch Write down the following information before you install the switch e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device Summitti Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i Switch LEDs Table 24 describes the LED activity on the Summitli Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i switches Table 24 Switch LED activity for the Summit1i Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i LED Color Indicates Unit Status LEDs PSU A PSU B Green The indicated PSU is powered up Amber The indicated PSU has a failure Green Amber The AC power cable is not inserted correctly blinking Off The PSU is not receiving power or no PSU is present MGMT Green The switch is operating normally Power On Self Test POST or software download in progress Amber The switch has failed its POST or is experiencing an overheat or fan failure Port Status LEDs Green Link is present port is enabled Amber Frames are being transmitted received on this port Green blinking Link is present port is disabled Off Link is not present 100 1000 Mbps Speed LEDs Gree
237. nt DC power supply 140 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 DC Power Supply To remove a DC power supply from the Alpine 3808 or the Alpine 3804 switch 1 Turn off the DC supply at both the source breaker and at the power supply breaker 2 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end of the ESD strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel Remove the plexiglas cover that shields the power connection on the power supply 4 Remove the DC power and ground cables from the power supply 5 Slide the locking safety latch on the power supply in the direction marked remove A CAUTION Ensure that the latch is in the remove position You cannot remove the power supply unless the latch is in the remove position 6 Use a 2 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the screw on the ejector injector lever then pull the ejector injector lever towards you to disengage the power supply connections from the backplane Hold on to the central handle to steady the power supply A CAUTION When you remove a power supply use one hand to support the power supply from the bottom and the other hand to hold the central handle on the front of the power supply Do not use just the ejector injector lever to remove a power supply 7 Use one hand on the central handle to slowly pull the power supply towards you Place your other
238. o DC power supplies and each power supply has its own on off switch If you have both power supplies powered on they provide a redundant load shared power supply to the Alpine 3802 switch If one of the power supplies fails the second power supply provides all power and ensures uninterrupted network operation Connect each power supply to different independent power sources If a power source fails it will only affect the switch power supply to which it is connected If all switch power supplies are connected to a single power source the entire switch is vulnerable to a power source failure A NOTE Do not attempt to fix a failed power supply power supplies are not user removable Alpine 3802 switch power supplies must be installed or removed by trained service personnel only Contact Extreme Networks Customer Support if you experience problems If you require DC power you must have two DC power supplies installed in the chassis Installing the Chassis The Alpine 3800 series chassis fits in standard 19 inch 48 26 cm racks Table 36 displays the height measurements for the Alpine 3800 series chassis Table 36 Alpine 3800 chassis height measurements Switch Model Height Alpine 3808 12U Alpine 3804 6U Alpine 3802 4U The Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 chassis are shipped with a preinstalled fan tray For your safety due to the increased weight of the chassis after components are installed and to prevent damage to the equipment
239. o ensure that your module is undamaged upon installation you can correlate factory test data with your installation site test data by consulting the average power reference values shown on the Product Name test data sheet Part No 121074 00 enclosed with your module To remove a Product Name 1 Turn the two captive screws counter clockwise until they are completely free from the I O module faceplate The captive screws will remain attached to the XENPAK Module A AA WARNING Remove the SC fiber optic connector from the Product Name prior to removing the Product Name from the I O module 2 Gripping both captive screws gently pull the XENPAK Module out of the slot Place the dust covers back into the XENPAK Module connectors Place the XENPAK Module immediately into an antistatic container to protect it from ESD damage and dust Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 277 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules 278 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Fan Tray This chapter describes e BlackDiamond 6816 Fan Trays on page 279 e BlackDiamond 6808 Fan Tray on page 280 e BlackDiamond 6804 Fan Tray on page 281 e Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray on page 282 e Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray on page 284 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any BlackDiamond fan tray BlackD
240. odules Otherwise you might unseat modules that you have not secured d_ If you install a slave MSM use the synchronize command to replicate all saved images and configurations from the master MSM to the slave MSM You are not prompted to synchronize the images and the configurations from the master to the slave If not synchronized the slave uses its image and the master configuration This image configuration mismatch will likely cause the switch to operate differently after failover CAUTION Depending on the size and complexity of your network you should install and configure a slave MSM module when there will be minimal network disruption You may need to reboot your switch after you use the synchronize command 6 Store the module packaging for future use 7 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install additional MSMs repeat steps 1 through 6 Verifying the MSM Module Installation After you install the MSM module verify that it is working correctly by checking the LEDs on the front panel of the MSM module If it is operating normally the front panel LED indicators appear as follows e SYS LED green blinking e MSTR LED Green Operating as master Amber Operating as slave e ENV green 234 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing MSMs e ERR off e Link Activity Green Link
241. of ports 1 through 8 or ports 9 through 16 are simultaneously forwarding unusually high rates of small uniformly sized packets for example 64 Byte the bandwidth through each port can be lower than the expected minimum of 250 Mbps When you install and configure a GM 16T module Extreme Networks does not recommend using the port based load sharing link aggregation algorithm when the share has more than four ports because traffic coming from the GM 16T or GM 16X3 modules will only load share over the first four ports of the share Load sharing using other load balancing algorithms can have up to eight links LEDs The GM 16T module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the GM 16T module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The GM 16T module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 7 0 1b11 or later and BootROM 7 8 or later on your switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 163 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules FM 24Ti Module Figure 74 shows the FM 24Ti module Figure 74 FM 24Ti module Module status LED 1 12 13 24 FM 247T om se Port status LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports 38_FM24T The FM 24Ti module has 24 10 100 Mbps autonegotiation Ethernet ports using standard RJ 21 connectors The FM 24Ti module supports 10BASE T and 100BASE TX Table 52 describes the cable specifications f
242. ogether between each set of three BlackDiamond 6816 chassis A patch panel does not require any power and does not generate any heat A NOTE Up to five adjacent BlackDiamond 6816 chassis will continue to function without safety concerns However product lifetime may degrade with continued exposure to high temperatures in close proximity and long term reliability may be compromised Airflow Requirements To ensure proper airflow through an Extreme Networks switch refer to the following recommendations when you are installing your switch e The Summit family of switches require 3 inches 7 62 cm on both the left and right sides of the switch 5 inches 12 7 cm recommended for proper airflow e The Alpine 3800 series chassis require 3 inches 7 62 cm on both the left and right sides of the switch 5 inches 12 7 cm recommended for proper airflow e The BlackDiamond 6816 and 6804 chassis require 3 inches 7 62 cm around the entire chassis front rear and sides 5 inches 12 7 cm recommended for proper airflow Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 39 Site Preparation e The BlackDiamond 6808 chassis requires 3 inches 7 62 cm around both the front and rear of the chassis 5 inches 12 7 cm recommended for proper airflow The airflow of the Summit family of switches moves from the left side of the switch to the right side of the switch or from the right side of the switch to the left side of the switch dependi
243. on the F48Ti module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Software Requirements The F48Ti module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 4 or later on the switch 252 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules F96Ti Module Figure 123 shows the F96Ti module Figure 123 F96Ti module Module status LEDs z Piao yd Jp ef 10 100 Mbps ports p gt P f COn BD_F96Ti The F96Ti has 96 10BASE T 100BASE TX ports available through eight RJ 21 telco connectors The RJ 21 port is shown in Figure 124 Figure 124 One RJ 21 port yields 12 10 100 ports Spare Spare Port 12 Port 12 Port 11 Port 11 Port 10 4 Port 10 Port 9 Port 9 Port 8 Port 8 Port 7 Port 7 Port 6 4 Port 6 Port 5 4 Port 5 Port 4 Port 4 Port 3 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 2 Port 1 Port 1 BD_037 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 253 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules Table 79 describes the pinouts for the RJ 21 port Table 79 Connector pinouts for the RJ 21 port RJ 45 Number RJ 21 Pin Numbers RJ 45 Pin Numbers 1 1 2 26 27 2 6 1 3 2 3 4 28 29 2 6 1 3 3 5 6 30 31 2 6 1 3 4 7 8 32 33 2 6 1 3 5 9 10 34 35 2 6 1 3 6 11 12 36 37 2 6 1 3 7 13 14 38 39 2 6 1 3 8 15 16 40 41 2 6 1 3 9 17 18 42 43 2 6 1 3 10 1
244. onblocking switch Table 67 shows that packet throughput between I O modules increases when additional MSMs are installed Table 67 Packet throughput between I O modules Chassis of MSMs Throughput BlackDiamond 6816 64 Gbps 128 Gbps 192 Gbps 256 Gbps 64 Gbps 128 Gbps BlackDiamond 6808 MN A O N Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 227 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module Table 67 Packet throughput between I O modules continued Chassis of MSMs Throughput BlackDiamond 6804 1 32 Gbps 2 64 Gbps You can install an MSM in one of the designated lettered slots in the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis e BlackDiamond 6816 Slots labeled A B C or D e BlackDiamond 6808 Slots labeled A or B e BlackDiamond 6804 Slots labeled A or B Figure 110 shows the front view of the MSM64i Figure 110 MSM64i Module ce Module status LEDs Module reset button Console port S Modem port S g Management port PCMCIA slot I EW_MSM64i Figure 111 shows the frontn view of the MSM 3 228 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Figure 111 MSM 3 Module aaa Module status LEDs ro Module reset button J Console port Modem port Management port PCMCIA slot DDD OoOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO 100000 N EX_002 The MSM 3 module allows cross module trunking on the BlackDiamond 6804
245. ons powering on AC rear view removing the chassis from a rack serial number SMMi description telecommunications standard Alpine switch general agency certifications components ESD preventing damage features grounding 104 136 104 136 133 139 137 304 304 308 184 118 305 125 119 305 133 119 128 119 145 304 131 308 133 140 139 137 304 304 308 183 116 305 125 117 305 133 117 128 117 145 304 304 111 113 109 127 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 333 I O modules environmental requirements LEDs port connections power supply power off specifications amperage calculating ANSI standards ARM module diagnostic service ports dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard GPP subsystem LEDs network processors telecommunications standard weight ATM module concatenated mode diagnostic service ports dimensions electromagnetic compatibility GPP subsystem LEDs network processors optical interface characteristics optical interfaces OC 3 multimode OC 3 single mode telecommunications standard weight B BlackDiamond 6804 switch 110 VAC power supply 220 VAC 48 VDC power supply dimensions electromagnetic compatibility front view installing the chassis MAC address MSM description rear view removing the chassis from a rack serial number telecommunications standard weight BlackDiamond 6808 switch 110 VAC power supply 220 VAC p
246. or installing and setting up network equipment It assumes a basic working knowledge of e Local Area Networks LANs e Ethernet concepts e Ethernet switching and bridging concepts e Routing concepts e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for information about configuring an Extreme Networks switch A NOTE If the information in the Release Notes that shipped with your switch differs from the information in this guide follow the Release Notes Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 13 Preface Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions used throughout this guide Table 1 Notice icons Icon Notice Type Alerts you to Note Important features or instructions Caution Risk of personal injury system damage or loss of data A A a Warning Risk of severe personal injury Ad Table 2 Text conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen or command syntax Screen displays bold This typeface represents commands that you type The words enter When you see the word enter in this guide you must type and type something and then press the Return or Enter key Do not press the Return or Enter key when an instruction simply says type Key names Key names appear in text in one of two ways e Referenced by their labels such as the Return ke
247. or the Alpine FM 24Ti module Appropriate cables are available from your local supplier Table 52 FM 24Ti cable specifications Connectors Cable Min Length Max Length Max Torque Lucent 525 Telco 50 pin RJ 21 Shielded trunk cable with 25 1m 100 m 4 in lbs CAT5 twisted pairs To access the ports use a 180 degree male RJ 21 connector with a shielded PVC trunk cable and secure to a maximum of 4 in lbs of torque You can access the ports in one of the following ways e Through a patch panel by terminating the cable and shield with an RJ 21 connector e Directly by using a cable that is terminated with 12 RJ 45 connectors The RJ 21 connector is shown in Figure 75 Figure 75 RJ 21 connector Screws secure connector to port XM_046 164 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules The default configuration of the FM 24Ti module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in autonegotiation mode LEDs The FM 24Ti module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the FM 24Ti module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The FM 24Ti module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 7 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later on your switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Gui
248. or the GBIC that is installed Initial ExtremeWare software versions do not support Serial ID GBICs If Serial ID GBICs are installed in a switch with an initial software release the switch will not bring up the link on GBIC ports GBIC Media Types and Distances Table 7 describes the media types and associated maximum distances for each GBIC type Table 7 GBIC types and maximum distances Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters SX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 500 850 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 160 220 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 200 275 LX 50 125 um multimode fiber 400 550 1310 nm optical window 50 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 62 5 125 um multimode fiber 500 550 10 125 um single mode fiber 5 000 10 125 um single mode fiber 10 000 ZX 10 125 um single mode fiber 50 000 1550 nm optical window ZX Rev 03 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window 24 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Table 7 GBIC types and maximum distances continued GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support Mhz Km Maximum Standard Media Type Rating Distance Meters LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maxi
249. or two power inputs depending on the switch model The Alpine 3800 series switch has either one or two power inputs depending on the switch model The BlackDiamond 6816 has either four 220 VAC power inputs eight 110 VAC power inputs or eight 48 VDC power inputs The BlackDiamond 6808 has either two 220 VAC power inputs four 110 VAC power inputs or four 48 VDC power inputs e Disconnect power before removing the back panel of an Alpine switch or BlackDiamond switch e The unit must be grounded Do not connect the power supply unit to an AC outlet without a ground connection Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 295 Safety Information e The unit must be connected to a grounded outlet to comply with European safety standards e The socket outlet must be near the unit and easily accessible You can only remove power from the unit by disconnecting the power cable from the outlet e This unit operates under Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV conditions according to the IEC 950 standard The conditions are only maintained if the equipment to which it is connected also operates under SELV conditions e The appliance coupler the connector to the unit and not the wall plug must have a configuration for mating with an EN60320 TEC320 appliance inlet e France and Peru only This unit cannot be powered from ITt supplies If your supplies are of IT type this unit must be powered by 230 V 2P T via an isolation transformer ratio 1 1 wi
250. ot chassis with backplane e One integrated management module e Three I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 3 e One or two preinstalled power supplies e One fan tray e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector e Six light emitting diode LED displays AR CAUTION The Alpine 3802 switch has an integrated Switch Management Module SMMi The integrated Switch Management Module is not hot swappable or user removable Do not attempt to remove the integrated Switch Management Module Contact Extreme Networks Customer Support if you experience problems Power Supply The Alpine 3800 series switch supports both AC and DC power supplies If two power supplies are installed in the switch both installed power supplies must be of the same type The AC power supplies auto sense for 110 VAC and 220 VAC power The DC power supplies require 48 VDC nominal input line voltage The Alpine 3800 series switch supports the following power supply configurations Table 34 Supported power supplies for the Alpine 3800 series switch Switch Model AC power supply DC power supply Hot swappable Alpine 38081 Up to two AC power Up to two DC power Yes supplies can be installed supplies can be installed Alpine 3804 Up to two AC power Up to two DC power Yes supplies can be installed supplies can be installed Alpine 38021 Up to two AC power Two DC power supplies No supplies can be installed 2 must be installed 1 All installat
251. ou should evaluate and compare your existing cable plant with the requirements of the Extreme Networks equipment to determine if you need to install new cables or cabling Step 3 Meeting Power Requirements To run your equipment safely you must meet the specific power requirements for the Extreme Networks equipment that you plan to install A NOTE Review and follow the safety information before you install your equipment Meeting Site Requirements This section addresses the various requirements to consider when preparing your installation site including e Operating Environment Requirements e Rack Specifications and Recommendations Operating Environment Requirements You need to verify that your site meets all environmental and safety requirements Virtually all areas of the United States are regulated by building codes and standards During the early planning stages of installing or modifying your LAN it is important that you develop a thorough understanding of the regulations that pertain to your location and industry Building and Electrical Codes Building and electrical codes vary depending on your location Comply with all code specifications when planning your site and installing cable The following sections are provided as a resource to obtain additional information 36 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Meeting Site Requirements Three major building codes are Uniform Building Code produ
252. ounding the chassis see Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis on page 127 You need the following tools and equipment to install the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC power supplies e ESD preventive wrist strap e 2 Phillips screwdriver e DC power supply To install the Alpine 3808 or the Alpine 3804 DC power supplies 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 If there is a blank faceplate covering the power supply bay remove it and save it for future use 3 Prepare the power supply for installation as shown in Figure 60 and Figure 61 e Use the text on the front of the power supply to ensure that it is oriented correctly for either the Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 e Open the ejector injector lever e Move the safety latch to the remove position e Place the breaker in the off position Figure 60 DC power supply for the Alpine 3808 switch Ejector am injector On off Safety lever Handle switch latch O oO WHEN INSTALLED IN 3808 THIS WAY UP dN AVM SIHL P08 NI G3TTVLSNI NIHM de ESD wrist strap connector 38_DCPS8 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 137 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies Figure 61 DC
253. ow LX70 10 125 um single mode fiber 70 000 1550 nm optical window LX100 10 125 um single mode fiber 100 000 1550 nm optical window UTP Category 5 UTP cable 80 Extreme Networks proprietary Connections between two Extreme Networks 1000BASE LX interfaces can use a maximum distance of 10 000 meters A NOTE For more information about the supported GBIC types see GBIC Specifications on page 25 LEDs Both Summitil models have the following LEDs e Unit status e Management e Port status e Port speed For information about the LEDs and their activity on the Summitli switch see Summitli Summit5i Summit7i and Summit48i Switch LEDs on page 77 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 67 Summit Switch Models Summit1i Switch Rear View Figure 17 shows the rear view for both available Summitli switch models Figure 17 Rear view of the Summit1i switch AC Connectors Label Reset button Console port MODEL PART No SERIAL No o MAC ADDRESS ki SHG_Rri Power Sockets The Summitli switch supports up to two power supplies Each power supply has its own power socket When a second power supply is installed and connected to a second independent power source both provide a redundant load shared power source to the Summitli switch If one of the power sources or power supplies fails the second power supply provides all power n
254. ower and ground cables use 8 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Alpine 3808 10 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Alpine 3804 14 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Alpine 3802 BlackDiamond International e Use 55 A service for BlackDiamond DC power supplies e For BlackDiamond DC power cables use 4 AWG high strand count copper wire cable e Use a vinyl floor covering in your wiring closet Concrete floors accumulate dust and carpets can cause static electricity e Prevent unauthorized access to wiring closets by providing door locks Install the equipment in a secured enclosed and restricted access area ensuring that only qualified service personnel have access to the equipment e Provide adequate overhead lighting for easy maintenance e Ensure that each wiring closet has a suitable ground All distribution racks and equipment installed in the closet should be grounded e Ensure that all system environmental requirements are met such as ambient temperature and humidity A NOTE Extreme Networks recommends that you consult an electrical contractor for commercial building and wiring specifications 38 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Meeting Site Requirements Temperature Extreme Networks equipment generates a significant amount of heat It is essential that you provide a temperature controlled environment for both performance and safety Install the equipment on
255. ower supply 48 VDC power supply certification marks console port dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental requirements front view installing the chassis MAC address MSM description rear view removing the chassis from a rack 268 268 268 330 330 215 214 216 306 306 204 206 205 227 205 210 205 306 306 215 214 216 308 229 306 306 308 202 206 202 227 203 210 serial number telecommunications standard weight BlackDiamond 6816 switch 110 VAC power supply 220 VAC power supply 48 VDC power supply certification marks console port dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental requirements front view installation installing the chassis MAC address MSM description removing the chassis from a rack serial number telecommunications standard weight BlackDiamond switch general agency certifications checking the installation components ESD preventing damage features grounding heat dissipation 110 VAC 220 VAC 48 DC I O modules environmental requirements LEDs port connections power supply specifications powering on power off specifications telecommunications standard building codes bundling cable C cable identification records cable labeling identification records cable manager cable requirements bend radius fiber optic UTP meeting cable types and distances cabling standards ANSI BISCI certification marks chassis front view Alpine 3802 Alpine 3804
256. page 111 e Following Safety Information on page 112 Summary of Features This section describes the features of the Alpine family of switches If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this guide follow the release notes For more information about configuring the switch refer to the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and The ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide The features of the Alpine 3800 series switch include e A 9 slot chassis that can be populated with up to eight input output I O modules and one Switch Management Module SMMi Alpine 3808 e A 5 slot chassis that can be populated with up to four I O modules and one SMMi Alpine 3804 e A 3 slot chassis that can be populated with up to three I O modules Alpine 3802 e I O modules that are hot swappable and include Gigabit Ethernet or 10 100 Mbps Ethernet ports e Redundant load sharing hot swappable power supplies Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 e Field replaceable hot swappable fan tray Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 e Fully nonblocking operation All ports transmit and receive packets at wire speed e Autonegotiation for half duplex or full duplex operation on 10 100 Mbps ports e Load sharing on multiple ports e VLANs including support for IEEE 802 10 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 109 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Overview e STP IEEE 802 1D with multiple STP domains e Policy Based QoS e Wire speed IP routing e IP multi
257. pation 300 environmental requirements 308 LEDs 77 85 front view 66 MAC address 72 GBIC support 66 management port 72 heat dissipation 300 port configurations 69 LEDs 77 85 power supply 71 MAC address 68 power supply specifications 300 port configurations 66 power off specifications 301 power supply 68 rear view 71 power supply specifications 300 reset button 72 power off specifications 301 serial number 72 rear view 68 weight 299 reset button 68 Summit7i switch serial number 68 agency certifications 300 weight 299 certification marks 308 Summit200 24 switch console port location 74 serial number 87 dimensions 299 Summit48i switch electromagnetic compatibility 300 agency certifications 300 environmental requirements 308 certification marks 308 front view 73 console port location 80 GBIC support 74 dimensions 299 heat dissipation 300 electromagnetic compatibility 300 LEDs 77 85 environmental requirements 308 MAC address 77 front view 78 management port 76 GBIC support 78 modem port 76 heat dissipation 300 port configurations 73 LEDs 77 85 power supply 76 MAC address 80 power supply specifications 300 port configurations 78 power off specifications 301 power supply 80 rear view 76 power supply specifications 301 reset button 75 power off specifications 301 serial number 77 rear view 80 weight 299 reset button 80 switch serial number 80 bottom view weight 299 Summit48si 84 Summit48si switch front view agency certifications 300 Summitli 6
258. pending on which power supplies are installed Table 82 F96Ti modules supported Chassis Power Supply F96Ti Module Additional Modules BlackDiamond 6804 iPower power supplies 4 0 BlackDiamond 6808 original power supplies 6 0 BlackDiamond 6808 iPower power supplies 7 1 ARM G8Xi G12SXi P3cSi P3cMi P12cMi or WDMi BlackDiamond 6816 iPower power supplies 15 0 256 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules F32Fi Module Figure 126 shows the F32Fi module Figure 126 F32Fi module r t Module status LEDs Port status LEDs JEE E AG Ee Ble Bo e E EE E BIB 100 Mbps BE ports Ee Ee BE AHA Ee NEE N E BILE 00000 O BD_F32Fi All F32Fi ports have 32 100BASE FX ports and use standard MT RJ connectors The default configuration of the F32Fi modules is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in 100 Mbps full duplex mode Half duplex mode is not supported LEDs The F32Fi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the F32Fi module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Software Requirements The F32Fi module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 6 1 8 or later and BootROM 6 5 or
259. plicitly save the configuration to nonvolatile RAM NVRAM You can configure parameters of the I O module after it is installed or you can pre configure a slot for a certain type of module and configuration The pre configured information is applied to the module after it is inserted If you pre configure a slot for a specific module type and then insert a different type of module the module reverts to its default configuration Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 237 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules A NOTE See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide for more information about configuring I O modules G8Ti Module Figure 115 shows the G8Ti module Figure 115 G8Ti module Module status LEDs 100 1000 Mbps ports with status LEDs and speed LEDs XM_G8Ti The G8Ti module has eight autosensing 100 1000BASE T ports that use standard RJ 45 connectors The default configuration of the G8Ti module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in auto negotiation mode LEDs The G8Ti module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status e Port speed For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G8Ti module see I O Module
260. power from the unit before opening the fuse holder cover 2 Release the fuse holder by gently levering a small screwdriver under the fuse holder catch 3 Replace the fuse Use only fuses of the same manufacturer rating and type as the original 4 Close the fuse holder a E Fuse UK_fuse To comply with European safety standards a spare fuse must not be fitted to the appliance inlet Use only fuses of the same manufacturer make and type Connections Fiber Optic ports Optical Safety To protect your eyes never look at the transmit LED laser through a magnifying device while it is powered on Never look directly at a fiber port on the switch or at the ends of fiber cable when they are powered on This is a Class 1 laser device a AA WARNING Use fiber optic ports only for data communications applications that require optical fiber Use only with the appropriate connector When not in use replace dust cover Using this module in ways other than those described in this manual can result in intense heat that can cause fire property damage or personal injury Lithium Battery The battery in the bq4830 DS1644 device is encapsulated and not user replaceable The battery is located on the SMMi for the Alpine switch and the MSM motherboard for the BlackDiamond switch If service personnel disregard the instructions and attempt to replace the bq4830 DS1644 replace the lithium battery with the same or equivalent
261. powered down PSU A Green PSU is OK PSU B Amber DC output failure Off PSU not present or not powered 146 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing SMMi Modules Installing SMMi Modules You can insert the SMMi module at any time without causing disruption of network services You need the following tools and equipment to install the SMMi module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e SMMi module To install the SMMi 1 Locate the top unnumbered slot of the chassis This is where you install the SMMi AM CAUTION You can install the SMMi in the designated top orange slot of the Alpine 3808 or 3804 chassis only SMMi modules do not fit in numbered slots Forceful insertion can damage the module 2 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 3 Remove the blank faceplate from the slot to make room for the module if applicable A NOTE Any unoccupied module slot in the chassis should have a blank faceplate installed to ensure satisfactory protection from EMI and to guarantee adequate airflow through the chassis 4 Grasp the module by its front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the edge of the metal panel Check the connectors for dust and packing materials A CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only
262. r Supply Requirements Adhere to the following requirements in order to operate your Extreme Networks equipment safely Ensure that your equipment is placed in an area that accommodates the power consumption and component heat dissipation specifications Ensure that your power supply meets the site power AC power or DC power requirements of the network equipment Ensure that DC connections are made by an on site electrician A NOTE For power specifications for Extreme Networks products see the Extreme Networks website at http www extremenetworks com When connecting power to installed equipment avoid connecting through an extension cord or power strip If your switch includes more than one power supply connect each power supply to different independent power sources If a power source fails it will only affect the switch power supply to which it is connected If all switch power supplies are connected to a single power source the entire switch is vulnerable to a power source failure AC Power Cable Requirements Use an AC power cable appropriate for your country Check your local electrical codes and regulatory agencies for power cable requirements The countries listed in Table 19 have the following additional requirements Table 19 AC power cable requirements Country Requirements USA and Canada The cable set must be UL approved and CSA certified The minimum specification for the flexible cable is No
263. re Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Architecture Figure 87 Front view of the BlackDiamond 6816 switch with sample I O modules ESD wrist strap connector I O module slots MSM module slots I O module slots oo oo Power supplies oo BD_6816s BlackDiamond 6816 Switch Rear View The rear of the BlackDiamond 6816 switch provides e The chassis serial number e The Ethernet MAC address of the switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 199 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis e Symbols of safety certification Figure 88 shows the rear view of the BlackDiamond 6816 switch Figure 88 Rear view of the BlackDiamond 6816 switch
264. res This guide contains seven parts e Common Features Describes features that are shared by the Extreme Networks family of switches This section describes software images full duplex support management ports mini GBIC and GBIC modules and their installation e Site Planning Describes how to evaluate plan and determine the location of your Extreme Networks switch e Summit Switch Describes the features that are specific to the Summit switch This section provides an overview of the Summit switch information about model types summary of features and installation guidelines e Alpine Switch Describes the features that are specific to the Alpine switch This section provides an overview of the Alpine switch information about model types a summary of features and installation guidelines e BlackDiamond Switch Describes the features that are specific to the BlackDiamond switch This section provides an overview of the BlackDiamond switch information about model types a summary of features and installation guidelines e Switch Operation Describes how to power on any Extreme Networks switch verify the switch installation connect equipment to the console port and log in to the switch for the first time e Appendixes Includes information about safety requirements and technical specifications How To Use This Guide Each chapter of this guide contains information on how to successfully operate your Extreme Networks s
265. reventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e Power supply A NOTE Ground the rack mount the chassis in a rack and ground the chassis before installing any switch components Complete the following tasks before installing any switch components e Ground the rack For more information about grounding the rack see Protective Grounding for the Rack on page 46 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 217 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies e Mount the chassis in a rack For more information about mounting the chassis see Installing the Chassis on page 205 e Ground the chassis For more information about grounding the chassis see Grounding the BlackDiamond 6800 Series Chassis on page 210 To install a power supply 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel 2 If there is a blank faceplate covering the power supply bay remove it and save it for future use 3 Prepare the power supply for installation For the BlackDiamond 6816 switch as shown in Figure 100 e Ensure that the power supply is right side up e Open the locking handle For the BlackDiamond 6808 or Black Diamond 6804 switch as shown in Figure 101 e Ensure that the power supply is right side up e Open the locking handle Figure 100 Installing a DC power supply in a BlackDiamond 6816
266. rise the Summit family of switches Summitli Summit5i Summit7i Summit48i Suumit48si Summit 200 24 Summit 200 48 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 59 Summit Switch Overview Summary of Features This section describes the features of the Summit family of switches If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this guide follow the release notes For more information about configuring the switch refer to the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and The ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide Summit series switches e Virtual local area networks VLANs including support for IEEE 802 10 and IEEE 802 1p e VLAN aggregation e Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D with multiple STP domains e Policy Based Quality of Service PB QoS e Wire speed Internet Protocol IP routing e IP multinetting e DHCP BOOTP relay e Extreme Standby Router Protocol ESRP e Ethernet Automated Protection Switching EAPS e Routing Information Protocol RIP version 1 and RIP version 2 e Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing protocol e Border Gateway Protocol BGP version 4 e IPX routing including RIP and Service Advertisement Protocol SAP e Wire speed IP multicast routing e DiffServ e Access policy support for routing protocols e Access list support for packet filtering e IGMP snooping e Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP e Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM
267. rom a rack To uninstall the Alpine 3800 series chassis from a rack you need the following tools equipment and resources e Helper bracket provided e A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket not provided e 1 Phillips screwdriver e A minimum of two people to help remove the chassis from the rack To remove the Alpine 3800 series chassis from a standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack 1 Unplug the power cable from the outlet and then from the switch before you attempt to remove the chassis components and the chassis from the rack 2 Mount the helper bracket in the rack directly beneath the chassis using four screws that are appropriate for your rack 3 To reduce weight and prevent possible equipment damage use a 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the e Power supply SMMi and I O modules from the Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 e I O modules from the Alpine 3802 For information about removing power supplies see Chapter 8 For information about removing the SMMi see Chapter 9 For information about removing I O modules see Chapter 10 4 Unscrew the chassis from the rack 5 Have a minimum of two people gently remove the chassis from the rack and place it on a secure flat surface with the front of the chassis facing you 6 Unscrew the helper bracket and remove it from the rack 128 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies This chapter describes
268. rom your Extreme Networks switch without powering off the system The module is shown in Figure 136 Figure 136 Product Name Card edge connector EWUG003B The Product Name is a Class 1 Laser device that operates at 5 V Use only Extreme approved devices on all Extreme switches 276 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing XENPAK Modules AR CAUTION The Product Name can emit invisible laser radiation Avoid direct eye exposure to beam A Warnine To prevent ESD damage to the Product Name always use an ESD preventive wrist strap when installing or removing the module Handle the module by its sides only Never touch the card edge connectors at the insertion end of the module To install a Product Name 1 Remove the XENPAK Module from its antistatic container and remove the dust covers from the module connectors If your module has a protective pad covering the card edge connector remove it Store the antistatic container dust covers and card edge connector protective pad in a clean location from which they can be easily retrieved if you need to uninstall the module 2 Holding the module by its sides insert it into the slot on the I O module Slide the module as far back into the slot as possible until you hear it click indicating that it is firmly attached 4 Secure the module to the I O module faceplate by turning the two captive screws clockwise until they are hand tight A NOTE T
269. rt an MSM module You need the following tools and equipment to install an MSM module e ESD preventive wrist strap e 1 Phillips screwdriver e MSM module To install the MSM 1 Select a slot for the module e Slots A through D in the BlackDiamond 6816 e Slots A through B in the BlackDiamond 6808 and BlackDiamond 6804 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 231 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module AR CAUTION You can install MSMs in lettered slots only MSMs do not fit in numbered slots Forceful insertion can damage the MSM module Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel Remove the blank faceplate from the slot to make room for the module if applicable A NOTE Any unoccupied module slot in the chassis should have a blank faceplate installed to ensure satisfactory protection from EMI and to guarantee adequate airflow through the chassis Grasp the module by its front panel with one hand and place your other hand under the edge of the metal panel to support the weight of the module Check the connectors for dust and packing materials AR CAUTION To prevent ESD damage handle the module by the metal panel edges only Never touch the components on the PCB or pins on any of the connectors For the BlackDiamond 6816 and the BlackDiamond 6804 ensure that the MSM is
270. ry cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 328 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond Modules Table 113 MPLS module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 6 inches 4 1 cm Width 15 1 inches 38 4 cm Depth 16 0 inches 40 6 cm Weight 5 25 lbs 2 38 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1999 Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21
271. s BDbrackt 2 Place the box that contains the chassis upright on a secure flat surface with the front of the box facing you Remove the chassis from the box and remove the packing material from the chassis 4 Have a minimum of two people lift and place the empty chassis on the helper bracket and slowly guide the chassis into the rack Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 125 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis 5 While holding the empty chassis secure it with four or eight suitable screws depending on the model e Alpine 3808 is shown in Figure 55 e Alpine 3804 is shown in Figure 56 e Alpine 3802 is shown in Figure 57 Figure 55 The Alpine 3808 chassis requires 8 screws to be securely mounted in a rack oO oO C3 i 2 O D 0 eA Fa SOS Aas tr ion gt ag W ale owe gs w a oO o o o Helper a A bracket O C2 O 38_rack8 126 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Chassis Figure 56 The Alpine 3804 chassis requires 8 screws to be securely mounted in a rack o fbi SOLE lt a a a ae O j esi gt oO zl a gS o 9 Os m oO a eS Helper eee bracket 5 5 O E 38_rack4 Figure 57 The Alpine 3802 chassis
272. s BlackDiamond 6816 Switch Front View The BlackDiamond 6816 switch consists of the following components e One 20 slot chassis with backplane e 16 I O module slots labeled slots 1 through 16 e Four MSM64i slots labeled slots A through D e Four power supply bays accessed from the front of the unit e Two fan trays accessed from the front of the unit Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 197 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis e Two side mounted handles for lifting the chassis e One electromagnetic discharge ESD wrist strap connector The BlackDiamond 6816 switch can support up to the following number of ports and types of port configurations e 1344 switched 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet ports e 448 switched 100BASE FX Fast Ethernet ports e 192 switched Gigabit Ethernet ports e 256 switched 1000BASE X oversubscribed ports e 360 switched 10 100 1000BASE T oversubscribed ports e 60 OC3 PoS ports e 60 OC3 ATM ports e 30 OC12 PoS ports A NOTE PoS and ATM modules installed in a BlackDiamond chassis require at least one BlackDiamond Ethernet VO module also installed in the chassis in order to operate correctly Figure 87 shows the front view of the BlackDiamond 6816 chassis installed with 4 MSMs and 16 optional I O modules A NOTE The BlackDiamond 6816 chassis only supports modules and power supplies with an i in their name such as the MSM64i 198 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardwa
273. s Related Publications About This Guide How To Use This Guide Common Features Summary of Common Switch Features Software Images Full Duplex Support Management Ports Mini GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support Mini GBIC Types and Specifications Safety Information Preparing to Install or Replace a Mini GBIC Installing and Removing a Mini GBIC GBIC Type and Hardware Software Support GBIC Media Types and Distances GBIC Specifications Long Range GBIC System Budgets Safety Information Preparing to Install or Replace a GBIC Installing or Replacing a GBIC Part 2 Site Planning 13 14 14 15 15 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 23 24 24 25 28 29 29 30 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Chapter 2 Part 3 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Site Preparation Planning Your Site Step 1 Meeting Site Requirements Step 2 Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements Step 3 Meeting Power Requirements Meeting Site Requirements Operating Environment Requirements Rack Specifications and Recommendations Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements Cabling Standards Cable Labeling and Record Keeping Installing Cable RJ 45 Connector Jackets Radio Frequency Interference Making Network Interface Cable Connections Meeting Power Requirements Power Supply Requirements AC Power Cable Requirements Uninterruptable Power Supply Requirements Applicable Industry Standards Summit Switch Summit Switch Overview Summ
274. s the POST the MGMT LED shows a solid yellow light A NOTE See Chapter 9 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module for more information about switch management module LED activity and Chapter 10 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules for more information about I O module LED activity Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply This section describes the steps to successfully install and power your Alpine 3808 or Alpine 3804 DC power supply e Selecting the cabling e Installing the DC power supply e Attaching the cabling and supplying power e Verifying a successful installation For centralized DC power connections install only in a restricted access area Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 135 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies Selecting the Cabling Use the following guidelines when selecting cabling for the DC power supplies e Each DC power supply requires 30 A Alpine 3808 at 48 VDC nominal 16 5 A Alpine 3804 at 48 VDC nominal Or equivalent power between 40 and 70 VDC e For DC power and ground cables use 8 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Alpine 3808 10 AWG high strand count copper wire cable Alpine 3804 Use power cables with the specifications outlined in Table 40 Table 40 Source DC power specifications for the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 Switch Characteristic Specification Alpine 3808 DC power cable size 8 AWG high
275. scribed ports e 16 switched 10 100 1000BASE T oversubscribed ports e 12 switched T1 ports e 12 switched E1 ports e 16 switched Ethernet over VDSL ports e 3 switched T3 ports Figure 50 shows the Alpine 3802 chassis installed with three optional I O modules Figure 50 Front view of the Alpine 3802 switch with sample I O modules installed ESD eee eso O 7 C 7 ooog 45310 00 3 E K I WMATE I O d EA in module n slots FM24T _ 00 1 SSS Gzzz H O arer M m D ea eea Management port Console port Reset button 3802chas The Alpine 3802 switch provides up to 16 Gigabits of full duplex bandwidth and supports all existing Alpine Ethernet I O modules I O modules with the green stripe including the Alpine Access I O modules I O modules with the silver stripe For more information about the Alpine I O modules see Chapter 10 Alpine 3802 Switch Mode of Operation The Alpine 3802 switch operates in three modes e Extended All slots slots 1 2 and 3 are enabled Slot 1 supports all existing Alpine modules Alpine Ethernet I O modules green stripe and Alpine Access I O modules silver stripe Slots 2 and 3 support only Alpine Access I O modules silver stripe e Standard Only slots 1 and 2 are enab
276. ss A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 311 Module Technical Specifications Table 96 GM 16X3 and GM 16T3 module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 3 75 lbs 1 7 kg GM 16X3 module Weight 4 Ibs 1 8 kg GM 16T3 module Safety Certifications and Standards UL 60950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 EN60950 2000 plus deviations IEC60950 2000 CB plus deviations TUV R GS Mark Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 NOM NYCE S Mark Argentina Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 8 11 CISPR22 1997 Class A CISPR24 1998 ETSI EN 300 386 2001 EN61000 3 2 3 CNS 13438 1998 Class A Ta
277. ssis DC input power is provided through a three pin connector on the front panel Before installing or removing a Summit48si DC power supply read the following warnings A WaRNiNe Before you can attach the keyed connector to the DC power supply the wiring harness supplied must be hardwired by a qualified licensed electrician A Warnine The Summit48si switch and rack must be connected to protective earth ground before installing any switch components A CAUTION If you are replacing a DC power supply disconnect the keyed DC connector from the power supply before removing it from the switch to prevent damage to the DC power supply output connector Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 101 Summit Switch Installation A NOTE For centralized DC power connection this product is intended to be installed in Restricted Access Areas Dedicated Equipment Rooms Equipment Closets or the like in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electric Code ANSI NFPA 70 You need the following tools and equipment to install a Summit48si switch DC power supply e ESD preventive wrist strap e 2 Phillips screwdriver e DC power supply To install the Summit48si DC power supply 1 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 2 If there is a blank faceplate co
278. stallation AR CAUTION Do not use the rack mount kits to suspend the switch under a table or desk or to attach the switch to a wall To mount the Summit switch in a standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack 1 If you are installing a Summit7i switch mount the helper bracket in the rack as shown in Figure 37 Use four screws not provided that are appropriate to your rack type A NOTE The Summit7i switch can weigh up to 55 pounds 24 9 kg A NOTE Only the Summit7i switch uses the helper bracket The helper bracket is not required to rack mount a Summit1i Summit5i Summit48i or Summit48si switch Figure 37 Helper bracket for the Summit7i switch BDbrackt Place the switch upright on a secure flat surface with the front of the switch facing you Remove the switch from the box and remove the packing material from the switch Remove the existing screws from the sides of the case retain the screws for Step 6 a AeA Q N Place a mounting bracket over the mounting holes on one side of the unit 94 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Mounting the Switch in a Rack 6 Insert and tighten the screws with a suitable screwdriver as shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39 Figure 38 An example of fitting the mounting bracket into the switch EW_rack Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 95 Summit Switch Installation Figure 39 Fitting t
279. standard 319 tools installation 231 tools removal 235 verifying the installation 234 weight 319 Multi Protocol Label Switching Module See MPLS module N network processors ARM module 262 ATM module 269 MPLS module 265 PoS module 259 O operating environment requirements 36 building codes 36 electrical codes 37 wiring closet 37 optical interfaces Class 1 laser device warning 297 optical safety precautions 297 optical fiber cable connections 52 P P12cMi module See PoS module P12cSi module See PoS module P3cMi module See PoS module P3cSi module See PoS module plenum rated cable 48 ports connections 86 89 console port settings 289 MSM 229 PoS module 258 concatenated mode 259 diagnostic service ports 260 dimensions 327 electromagnetic compatibility 327 environmental standard 327 GPP subsystem 260 LEDs 272 network processors 259 optical interface characteristics 259 optical interfaces OC 12 multimode 259 OC 12 single mode 259 OC 3 multimode 259 OC 3 single mode 259 telecommunications standard 327 weight 327 power cable replacing 54 power requirements 52 dual power supplies 54 power cable 53 54 power supply 52 power socket Alpine 3802 switch Summitli switch Summit48i switch Summit5i switch Summit7i switch power specifications Summit48i switch power supply Alpine 3800 series switch LEDs voltage Alpine 3804 switch installing AC power supply installing DC power supply removing AC power supply removi
280. strand count copper wire DC power cable lug Panduit copper standard barrel 2 hole lug Type LDC Panduit part number LCD4 14A L Thomas amp Betts part number LCN4 14 Power 40 70 VDC 30 A Alpine 3804 DC power cable size 10 AWG high strand count copper wire DC power cable lug Panduit copper standard barrel 2 hole lug Type LDC Panduit part number LCD4 14A L Thomas amp Betts part number LCN4 14 Power 40 70 VDC 16 5 A Installing the Power Supply This section describes how to install a DC power supply for both the Alpine 3808 switch and the Alpine 3804 switch The Alpine 3802 switch comes with DC power supplies that are preinstalled at the factory however you must attach the cabling to the DC power supplies See Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 DC Power Supply on page 141 for more information A NOTE Ground the rack mount the chassis in a rack and ground the chassis before installing any switch components Complete the following tasks before installing any switch components e Ground the rack For more information about grounding the rack see Protective Grounding for the Rack on page 46 e Mount the chassis in a rack For more information about mounting the chassis see Installing the Chassis on page 124 136 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply e Ground the chassis For more information about gr
281. switch automatically adjusts to the supply voltage The power supply operates down to 90 V Label The label on the rear of the Summit 200 24 switch displays important information about your switch Write down the following information before you install the switch e Model number Shows the model number assigned to this device e Part number Shows the part number assigned to this device e Serial number Refer to the serial number when you contact Extreme Networks technical support e MAC address Shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device A NOTE The Summit 200 24 switch certification and safety label is located on the bottom of the switch Summit 200 24 Switch LEDs Table 29 describes the LED behavior on the Summit 200 24 switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 87 Summit Switch Models Table 29 Summit 200 24 switch LED behavior Unit Status LED MGMT LED Color Indicates Green solid The Summit switch is operating normally Green blinking The Summit switch POST is in progress Amber The Summit switch has failed its POST or an overheat condition is detected Fan LED Color Indicates Green The fan is operating normally Amber blinking A failed condition is present on the fan Port Status LEDs Ports 1 26 Color Indicates Green Link is present port is enabled Green blinking Link is present port is enabled and there is activity on the port Off Link is not present or the port is dis
282. switch populated with a GM 4Xi module do one of the following e Install a maximum of three LX100 GBICs per GM 4Xi module the fourth GBIC slot must remain empty e Install two or less LX100 GBICs per GM 4Xi module and leave the remaining GBIC slots empty e Install two or less LX100 GBICs per GM 4Xi module and install any combination of the following GBICs into the empty slots 1000BASE 5X 1000BASE LX ZX GBIC ZX Rev 03 LX70 UTP GBIC To ensure correct operation of the LX100 GBIC make sure that you run ExtremeWare 6 1 9 or later on your switch A NOTE For more information about the supported GBIC types see GBIC Specifications on page 25 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 155 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules LEDs The GM 4Xi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the GM 4Xi module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 156 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules GM 4Si Module Figure 70 shows the GM 4Si module Figure 70 GM 4Si module Module status 1000 Mbps ports LED I f CGS Port status LEDs 38_GM4S The GM 4Si module has four Gigabit Ethernet ports using standard MT RJ connectors The GM 4Si module supports 1000BASE SX only The default configuration of the GM 4Si module is as follows All ports
283. system management functions For example OSPF computation and SNMP functions are performed by the master MSM Packet handling is distributed among the CPUs of all installed MSMs Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 229 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module When you save the switch configuration it is saved to all MSMs If you download a new ExtremeWare image the image is downloaded to all MSMs Selection of the master MSM occurs automatically The following scenarios describe the selection process e When the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch boots with one or more MSMs already installed and an MSM module is installed in slot A the MSM in slot A becomes the master e When the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch boots with a single MSM regardless of the slot position it is selected as the master If additional MSMs are added to the switch after powered on the added MSMs become the slaves MSMs that operate as slaves can be inserted and removed without disrupting network services e Ifyou remove the master MSM while the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch is operating the slave MSM experiences a soft reset and then becomes the master MSM For example if you have a BlackDiamond 6816 switch with a master MSM in slot A and slave MSMs in slots B through D and you remove the master MSM from slot A the slave in slot B becomes the master MSM Memory The MSM has two 144 pin SODIMM sockets and ships with two 128 MB SO
284. t to support expanded functionality features and flexibility The GPP subsystem handles system control and ARM management functions The GPP subsystem resides outside the packet forwarding data path to optimize routing and billing performance 262 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules ARM LED Indicators The ARM is equipped with two module level LED indicators STATUS and DIAG see Figure 131 e STATUS LED Located near the top end of the ARM front panel near the ejector injector handle This LED indicator is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals the operating status of the module e DIAG LED Located beside the STATUS LED The LED is a bi color LED displaying in either green or amber that signals whether diagnostics are being run on the module A NOTE During the ARM module boot up the Status and Diag LEDs may be incorrectly lit to solid green or solid amber The LEDs reflect their true state after approximately 30 seconds when the module has completed its boot cycle For more information on ARM module LED activity see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Service Ports The ARM module is equipped with two front panel service ports one port is a DB 9 connector the other is a micro HD 15 connector see Figure 131 Both ports are reserved for use only by Extreme Networks technical support personnel for diagnostic purposes Figure 131 Showing the components and
285. taining screws from the Summit48si power supply A OQ a p Q C 3 Use the handle to slowly pull the power supply towards you as shown in Figure 41 48i1_01 A WaRNiNe Do not insert your fingers or hands into the empty power supply bay Figure 41 Removing the Summit48si AC power supply 48i1_02 4 If you are not going to install a replacement power supply cover the power supply bay with the blank faceplate that was originally supplied with the switch Otherwise follow the Summit48si AC power supply installation procedure to install a new power supply To install a Summit48si AC power supply Remove the blank faceplate from the power supply bay 1 2 Use the handle to gently slide the power supply into the bay 3 Replace and tighten the two captive retaining screws using a 2 Phillips screwdriver 4 To turn the power supply on connect the AC power cable to the power supply and then to the wall outlet A WARNING Do not plug in the power cable into the power supply unless the power supply is installed 5 Keep the faceplate and the power supply packaging for future use 98 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket Installing the AC Power Cable Retaining Bracket This section describes how to install the AC power cable retaining bracket on a Summit switc
286. tch PC Terminal Cable connector 9 pin female Cable connector 25 pin male female Screen Shell __ 1 Screen TxD 3 3 RxD RxD 2 e 2 TxD Ground 5 7 Ground RTS 7 4 RTS CTS 8 20 DTR DSR 6 5 CTS DCD 1 6 DSR DTR 4 as A 8 DCD 25pin Figure 143 shows the pinouts for a 9 pin to 9 pin PC AT null modem serial cable Figure 143 PC AT serial null modem cable pinouts Switch PC AT Serial Port Cable connector 9 pin female Cable connector 9 pin female Screen Shell Shell Screen DTR 4 1 DCD TxD 3 2 RxD RxD 2 3 TxD CTS 8 4 DTR Ground 5 5 Ground DSR 6 6 DSR RTS 7 7 RTS DCD 1 8 CTS 290 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Logging In for the First Time Logging In for the First Time After your switch has completed all POSTs it is operational When the switch is operational you can log in and configure an IP address for the default VLAN named default To manually configure the IP settings 1 Connect a terminal or PC with terminal emulation software to e The console port for Summit switches e The SMMi for the Alpine 3808 and Alpine 3804 switches e The console port for the Alpine 3802 switch e The MSM for BlackDiamond switches 2 At your terminal press Return one or more times until you see the login prompt At the login prompt enter the defau
287. terion Test Performance Test Standard CE required CE required Specification Criterion Immunity to EN 61000 4 2 8kV air discharge B 15kV air B electrostatic 4kV contact discharge discharge 8kV discharge contact discharge Immunity to EN 61000 4 3 80 1000 MHz 3V m A 80 1000 MHz A radiated RF electric 80 AM 1kHz 10V m 80 AM fields Modulation 1kHz Immunity to fast EN 61000 4 4 Data lines 0 5kV B B transients Power lines 1kV Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 323 Module Technical Specifications Table 108 Immunity standards for the 10GLRi module continued Performance Test Specification Criterion Test Performance Test Standard CE required CE required Specification Criterion Immunity to power EN 61000 4 5 1kV line to line 2kV B z A surges line to earth Immunity to RF EN 61000 4 6 150kHz 80MHz 3V A A common mode RMS 80 AM 1kH2 Power frequency EN 61000 4 8 50Hz 1A m RMS A A magnetic field Mains voltage dips EN 61000 4 11 30 reduction for 10mS B A 60 reduction for C B 100mS Voltage EN 61000 4 11 gt 95 for 5000mS C B interruptions Immunity to ENV 50204 900MHz 5MHz 3V m A A radiated RF field Keyed carrier Performance criteria follows 50 duty cycle 200Hz replicating frequency e A Unit continues to function with maximum of 10 traffic loss 10 CRC errors during the application of interference and recovers without operator intervention e B
288. th the secondary connection point labeled Neutral and connected directly to ground Power Cable Use an AC power cable appropriate for your country Check your local electrical codes and regulatory agencies for power cable requirements The countries listed below have the following additional requirements e USA and Canada The cable set must be UL listed and CSA certified The minimum specification for the flexible cable is No 18 AWG 1 5 mm Type SVT or SJT 3 conductor The cable set must have a rated current capacity of at least the amount rated for each specific product The AC attachment plug must be an Earth grounding type with a NEMA 5 15P 10 A 125 V configuration e Denmark The supply plug must comply with section 107 2 D1 standard DK2 1la or DK2 5a e Switzerland The supply plug must comply with SEV ASE 1011 e Argentina The supply plug must comply with Argentinian standards A NOTE When using dual power supplies make sure that each AC power supply attaches to an independent power source Fuse This information only pertains to the Summit series of switches with the exception of the Summit7i The unit automatically adjusts to the supply voltage and it is suitable for both 110 VAC and 200 240 VAC operation 296 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Important Safety Information To change the fuse in a Summit series switch 1 To change the fuse disconnect
289. that the leash is securely grounded before handling a bare printed circuit assembly e Some devices such as I O modules contain fiber optic ports To protect your eyes you should never look at the fiber optic ports while they are on or look directly at the fiber cable ends when they are on Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 113 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Overview 114 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis There are three models in the Alpine 3800 series the Alpine 3808 switch the Alpine 3804 switch and the Alpine 3802 switch This chapter describes e Alpine 3800 Series Architecture on page 115 e Installing the Chassis on page 124 Rack Installation on page 125 Grounding the Alpine 3800 Series Chassis on page 127 e Removing the Chassis on page 128 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any Alpine chassis Alpine 3800 Series Architecture This section describes and shows the architecture of the Alpine 3800 series chassis For each chassis the e Front view shows an example of a completely installed chassis with optional I O modules that you can install in the chassis e Rear view shows the back of the chassis Alpine 3808 Switch Front View The Alpine 3808 switch consists of the following components e One 9 slot chassis with backplane e Eight I O module slots labeled 1 through 8 e
290. the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end to the ground receptacle that is located on the top left corner of the switch front panel 2 For the BlackDiamond 6816 switch or the BlackDiamond 6804 switch use a 1 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two screws that secure the fan tray on the front of the chassis For the BlackDiamond 6808 switch use a 1 Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the ten screws that secure the fan tray to the rear of the chassis Put the screws aside in a safe place 282 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Fan Tray 3 For the BlackDiamond 6816 switch or the BlackDiamond 6804 switch use the handle on the front of the fan tray to pull it straight out of the chassis approximately inch 12 7 mm as shown in Figure 140 This action disconnects the power to the fan tray For the BlackDiamond 6808 switch grasp the edges of the two handles on the front of the fan tray to pull it straight out of the chassis approximately inch 12 7 mm as shown in Figure 141 This action disconnects power to the fan tray Figure 140 An example of removing the BlackDiamond 6816 or the BlackDiamond 6804 fan tray ith hh M BD_030 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 283 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Fan Tray Figure 141 An example of removing the BlackDiamond 6808 fan tray
291. the Mogul 100 that are controlled by the FM 8Vi accept configurations using the same commands and procedures as the ports on the FM 32Ti and FM 24Fi modules except that the ports can only be configured for 10 Mbps The slot configuration command now includes a keyword to specify the FM 8Vi To configure the slot for the FM 8Vi use the following command config slot lt slot gt module fm8v The following example configures slot 2 for the FM 8Vi module config slot 2 module fm8v Displaying VDSL Statistics For the FM 8Vi module the show port command has been enhanced to show VDSL statistics To display VDSL statistics use the following command show port lt portlist gt vdsl stats The following command displays the VDSL statistics for ports 2 1 through 2 4 show port 2 1 2 4 vdsl stats 174 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules WM 4T1i Module Figure 82 shows the WM 4T1i module Figure 82 WM 4T1i module Port status LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports Ware 7 z 7 z 45302 E a a rl O Module status LEDs T1 ports 38_WM4T1 The WM 4T1i module has four T1 ports using RJ 48 connectors and two 10 100 Mbps autonegotiating Ethernet ports using standard RJ 45 connectors The WM 4T1i also has eight internal loopback ports that allow you to configure bi directional rate limiting without tying up any of the externa
292. the plexiglas cover that shields the power connection on the power supply Strip 0 5 inches of insulation from the appropriate AWG high strand count copper cable 4 Insert the cable into the DC ground and power cable lugs on the power supply A CAUTION Ensure that no copper is visible between the lug and the cable insulation 5 Tighten the cable retention screw using a 2 phillips screwdriver to a maximum of 10 in lbs 1 2 Nm of torque 142 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Supplying Power to the Alpine 3802 DC Power Supply Replace the plexiglas cover Turn on the DC supply at both the wall breaker and at the power supply breaker Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Verifying a Successful Installation After you supply power to the Alpine switch the switch performs a power on self test POST During the POST All ports are temporarily disabled The packet LED is off The power LED is on The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST If the switch passes the POST the MGMT LED blinks at a slow rate one blink per second If the switch fails the POST the MGMT LED shows a solid yellow light A NOTE See Chapter 9 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module for more information about switch management module LED activity and Chapter 10 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules for mor
293. ting in standard mode A NOTE The Alpine 3802 switch has an integrated Switch Management Module that is located in the chassis The module is not hot swappable or user removable Do not attempt to remove Contact Extreme Networks Customer Support if you experience problems Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 121 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis Alpine 3802 Switch Rear View The Alpine 3802 switch comes in two versions AC and DC e Figure 51 shows the rear view of the Alpine 3802 switch with AC power supplies installed e Figure 52 shows the rear view of the Alpine 3802 switch with DC power supplies installed Alpine 3802 AC Rear View Figure 51 Rear view of the Alpine 3802 switch with dual AC power supplies O00000 CEE amp 8 g co es Grounding Label studs 3802rear The rear view of the Alpine 3802 AC switch provides e Access to the grounding studs e The chassis serial number e The Ethernet MAC address of the switch e Symbols of safety certification Power Sockets The Alpine 3802 switch supports up to two AC power supplies Each power supply has its own power socket When a second power supply is installed both provide a redundant load shared power supply to the Alpine 3802 switch If one of the power supplies fails the second power supply provides all power and ensures uninterrupted network operation A NOTE Do not a
294. tion identifying ZX GBIC Rev 03 industry standards installation AC power cable retaining bracket Summit switch AC power supply Alpine 3804 switch AC power supply Alpine 3808 switch Alpine 3802 chassis Alpine 3804 chassis Alpine 3804 fan tray Alpine 3808 chassis Alpine 3808 fan tray Alpine I O modules BlackDiamond 6800 series power supplies BlackDiamond 6804 chassis BlackDiamond 6804 switch fan tray BlackDiamond 6808 chassis BlackDiamond 6808 switch fan tray BlackDiamond 6816 chassis BlackDiamond 6816 switch fan tray BlackDiamond I O modules connecting network interface cables DC power supply Alpine 3804 switch DC power supply Alpine 3808 switch GBIC helper bracket Alpine switch helper bracket BlackDiamond switch helper bracket Summit switch mini GBIC MSM removing Alpine 3804 AC power supply removing Alpine 3804 DC power supply removing Alpine 3808 AC power supply removing Alpine 3808 DC power supply slave MSM SMMi module Summit switch free standing rack mount installing cable bend radius fiber optic UTP cable distances fiber optic cable slack IP settings configuring L labeling system for cables laser safety Summit 200 series switch LEDs 110 VAC power supply BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 220 VAC power supply BlackDiamond 6800 series switch 48 VDC power supply BlackDiamond 6800 series switch Alpine 3800 series switch power supply Alpine 3802 switch Alpine I O modules ARM module 48 302 21
295. tional A NOTE Install your equipment rack near an easily accessible power outlet When you need to disconnect the power cable from your switch remove it first from the power source and then from the switch Securing the Rack The rack should be attached to the wiring closet floor with 3 8 inch 9 5 mm lag screws or equivalent hardware The floor under the rack should be level within 3 16 inch 5 mm Use a floor leveling cement compound if necessary or bolt the racks to the floor as shown in Figure 11 46 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements Figure 11 Properly secured rack a D Ow oe oO ono TT mot U Secure to floor with 3 8 inch lag screws or bolts SPG_007 Brace open distribution racks if the channel thickness is less than 1 4 inch 6 4 mm Evaluating and Meeting Cable Requirements This section addresses requirements for the that cable you should use when installing your network equipment It includes Cabling Standards Cable Labeling and Record Keeping Installing Cable RJ 45 Connector Jackets Radio Frequency Interference Cabling Standards We recommend using the BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International RCDD Registered Communications Distribution Designer which is glob
296. tive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 2000 330 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Common Module Specifications Table 115 describes the specifications common to all modules Table 115 Common module specifications Common Module Specifications Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Operating Humidity 10 to 95 relative humidity noncondensing Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 331 Module Technical Specifications 332 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Index Numerics 10GLRi module dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental standard telecommunications standard weight A A3cMi module See ATM module A3cSi module See ATM module AC power cable retaining bracket Summit switch Accounting and Routing Module See ARM module agency certifications Alpine 3800 series switch BlackDiamond 6800 series switch Summit i series switch Summit 200 series switch airf
297. to the left as shown in Figure 108 On a BlackDiamond 6808 or BlackDiamond 6804 disengage the power supply by rotating the handle out and down as shown in Figure 109 Figure 108 Removing BlackDiamond 6816 DC power supplies WSL AObe 002 ZHOOIOSA YSL Nobe 002 THOIS Be METO now BD_029 224 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply Figure 109 Removing BlackDiamond 6808 or BlackDiamond 6804 220 VAC power supplies g 6 BD_028 5 Slowly slide the power supply out of the chassis by grasping the edges of the power supply with both hands and pulling the po
298. tray place one hand under the fan tray and use the other hand to guide the fan tray into the slot Gently begin to insert the new fan tray into the slot A NOTE If the chassis is powered on the fan blades will begin turning as soon as the tray makes contact with the backplane 4 To secure the fan tray turn the screws clockwise until they become tight 5 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 187 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Fan Tray 188 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide A Part 5 BlackDiamond Switch BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Overview The BlackDiamond 6800 series switches are chassis based switches designed to be placed in the core of your network The BlackDiamond 6800 series switches are flexible and scalable making it easy for you to meet the changing requirements of your network Three models exist e The BlackDiamond 6816 20 slot chassis which can be populated with up to 16 input output I O modules and four Management Switch Fabric Modules MSMs e The BlackDiamond 6808 10 slot chassis which can be populated with up to eight I O modules and two MSMs e The BlackDiamond 6804 6 slot chassis which can be populated with up to four I O modules and two MSMs The combination of BlackDiamond Alpine and Summit switches delivers a consistent en
299. ts the minimum number of power supplies required to power up a BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis Table 62 PSUs required to power up the chassis Number of PSUs Switch Model Installed BlackDiamond 6816 2 BlackDiamond 6808 1 BlackDiamond 6804 1 A NOTE If you install four power supplies in your BlackDiamond 6816 chassis the power supplies will deliver full redundancy The BlackDiamond 6800 series switch generates SNMP traps for the following events e AC power source fails e Power supply fails e Power supply is removed For more information about planning your site and power requirements see Meeting Power Requirements in Chapter 2 For more information about the specifications of the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch power supplies see Table 92 on page 306 220 VAC Power Supplies If you install a 220 VAC power supply into the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis 220 Volts of power is required for full operation If 110VAC power is supplied some BlackDiamond I O modules might not power up The MSM performs power calculations and powers up the maximum number of I O modules from left slot 1 to right slot 8 in the BlackDiamond 6808 or top slot 1 to bottom slot 4 in the BlackDiamond 6804 and slot 16 in the BlackDiamond 6816 A module is skipped if that module is not within the power budget Using 110 VAC only eight modules in the BlackDiamond 6816 four modules in the BlackDiamond 6808 and two modules in the Blac
300. ttempt to fix a failed power supply power supplies are not user removable Alpine 3802 switch power supplies must be installed or removed by trained service personnel only Contact Extreme Networks Customer Support if you experience problems If you have one power supply installed in the Alpine 3802 it must be installed in the lower power supply tray PSU A 122 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpine 3800 Series Architecture Alpine 3802 DC Rear View For centralized DC power connections install only in a restricted access area Figure 52 Rear view of the Alpine 3802 switch with dual DC power supplies 48V RIN CB Grounding On Off Input terminal studs Label switches blocks 3802rear_DC The rear view of the Alpine 3802 DC switch provides e Access to the grounding studs e The chassis serial number e The Ethernet MAC address of the switch e Symbols of safety certification e On Off switches e Input terminal blocks Figure 53 shows a close up view of the Alpine 3802 DC connector Figure 53 View of the DC connector on the Alpine 3802 DC switch a A A L A A A A C 48V RTN J 3802DC_dtl Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 123 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Chassis On Off Switch The Alpine 3802 switch supports tw
301. type as recommended by the manufacturer A WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions 297 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Safety Information e Disposal requirements vary by country and by state e Lithium batteries are not listed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA as a hazardous waste Therefore they can typically be disposed of as normal waste e If you are disposing of large quantities contact a local waste management service e No hazardous compounds are used within the battery module e The weight of the lithium contained in each coin cell is approximately 0 035 grams e Two types of batteries are used interchangeably CR chemistry uses manganese dioxide as the cathode material BR chemistry uses poly carbonmonofluoride as the cathode material 298 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide switch Technical Specifications This appendix describes the technical specifications of the Extreme Networks family of switches Ws 1 e Summit i series switch specifications on page 299 e Summit 200 series switch specifications on page 302 e Alpine 3800 series switch specifications on page 304 e BlackDiamond 6800 series switch specifications on page 306 e Common switch specifications on page 308 T
302. uded with the Summit48si switch and DC power supply You must connect the harness to the DC source voltage at your facility before you can connect the keyed connector to the DC power supply You should provide proper connection and strain relief on this cable in accordance with all local and national electrical codes A WARNING Wiring the DC input power harness to your facilities DC source voltage must be performed by a qualified licensed electrician After the wiring harness is connected to a permanent DC voltage source by a qualified licensed electrician you can remove replace and maintain the Summit48si system without further electrician assistance Figure 45 Three wire Cable Harness EWUG005 Table 31 provides the wire to pin connection specifications A NOTE Each wire on the harness has been properly marked for proper attachment to the DC power source Leave these labels on each lead wire for future reference Table 31 Wire to Pin Connection Specifications Pin Wire Color Lead Wire Wire Label 1 Green Yellow Chassis Ground GRD Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 103 Summit Switch Installation Pin Wire Color Lead Wire Wire Label Red 48 V 48 V DC Black Return RTN 4 unused Use the guidelines in Table 32 when selecting cabling for the DC power supply Table 32 DC input power specifications Characteristic Specification DC power cable size 14 AWG 2mm high strand count copper wir
303. ugh 8 Verifying a Successful Installation After you supply power to the Alpine switch the switch performs a power on self test POST During the POST e All ports are temporarily disabled e The packet LED is off e The power LED is on e The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST If the switch passes the POST the MGMT LED blinks at a slow rate one blink per second If the switch fails the POST the MGMT LED shows a solid yellow light A NOTE See Chapter 9 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module for more information about switch management module LED activity and Chapter 10 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules for more information about I O module LED activity Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC Power Supply You need the following tools and equipment to remove the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 AC power supplies e ESD preventive wrist strap Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 133 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Power Supplies e 2 Phillips screwdriver e Replacement AC power supply To remove an AC power supply from the Alpine 3808 or the Alpine 3804 switch 1 Remove the AC power cable from the wall outlet and then from the power supply 2 Attach the ESD strap that is provided to your wrist and connect the metal end of the ESD strap to the ground receptacle that is located on the top right corner of the switch front panel 3 Slide the safety latch to the
304. uide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies This chapter describes e Installing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply on page 217 e Removing a BlackDiamond 6800 Series Power Supply on page 223 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install remove or supply power to any BlackDiamond power supply BlackDiamond power supplies are iPower power supplies Three types of power supplies are available e 220 VAC e 110 VAC e 48 VDC All installed power supplies must be of the same type You cannot mix 110 VAC 220 VAC and 48 VDC power supplies in a single chassis All BlackDiamond power supplies are fully fault tolerant hot swappable and they are load sharing Depending upon the modules installed in the chassis e Two power supplies can support a fully loaded BlackDiamond 6816 chassis e One power supply can support a fully loaded BlackDiamond 6808 chassis e One power supply can support a fully loaded BlackDiamond 6804 chassis To increase switch reliability you can install additional power supplies as needed If you have three or more power supplies installed in a BlackDiamond 6816 switch or two or more power supplies installed in a BlackDiamond 6808 or BlackDiamond 6804 switch you can remove one of the power supplies without turning off power to the chassis Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 213 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies Table 62 lis
305. ult configuration of the FM 32Pi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so on e Operate in autonegotiation mode Software requirements The FM 32Pi module requires ExtremeWare version 7 2 or later For more information about software requirements see the ExtremeWare Release Notes Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 171 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules LEDs The FM 32Pi module has the following LEDs e Internal power e External power e Status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the FM 32Pi module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 172 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules FM 8Vi Module Figure 81 shows the FM 8Vi module Figure 81 FM 8Vi module Module status LED FMSW 45310 O Port status LEDs VDSL ports 38_FM8V The FM 8Vi module has eight 10 Mbps VDSL ports using one standard RJ 21 connector and eight internal loopback ports for ingress rate shaping The FM 8Vi module supports 10BASE S The default configuration of the FM 8Vi module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so forth e Operate in autonegotation mode Connecting the FM 8Vi Module to the Mogul 100 The FM 8Vi uses a single RJ 21
306. unications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 313 Module Technical Specifications Table 98 FM 32Ti and FM 24Ti module specifications Physical Dimensions Height 1 5 inches 3 8 cm Width 16 25 inches 41 3 cm Depth 8 0 inches 20 3 cm Weight 4 lbs 1 8 kg Safety Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 UL 1950 3rd Edition listed accessory cUL listed accessory to CAN CSA C22 2 No 950 EN60950 1992 A1 A4 A11 1996 plus deviations IEC950CB IEC 60950 1991 A1 A4 1996 2nd Edition Low Voltage Directive LVD AS NZS 3260 S Mark Argentina EN60825 1 A11 1996 FCC CFR 21 CDRH Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Certifications and Standards NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 Issue2 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class A CAN ICES 003 Class A 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN55022 1998 Class A CISPR22 1997 Class A EN55024 1998 includes IEC 6100 4 2 3 4 5 6 11 EN6100 3 2 3 3 VCCI Class A Japan AS NZS 3548 Australia New Zealand NOM NYCE Mexico MIC Mark Korea GOST Russia CNS 13438 Class A Taiwan Environmental NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 63 Issue2 EN ETSI 300 019 Telecommunications NEBS Telcordia Type IV Level 3 GR 1089 GR 63 EN ETSI 300 386 2 v1 1 3 1997 314 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Alpi
307. ve sacks or place them on antistatic mats until you are ready to install them Wear an ESD preventive wrist strap and ensure that the leash is securely grounded before handling a bare printed circuit assembly e Some devices such as I O modules contain fiber optic ports To protect your eyes you should never look at the fiber optic ports while they are on or look directly at the fiber cable ends when they are on Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 195 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Overview 196 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Chassis There are three models in the BlackDiamond 6800 series The BlackDiamond 6816 switch the BlackDiamond 6808 switch and the BlackDiamond 6804 switch This chapter describes e BlackDiamond 6800 Series Architecture on page 197 e Installing the Chassis on page 205 Rack Installation on page 206 Grounding the BlackDiamond 6800 Series Chassis on page 210 e Removing the Chassis on page 210 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove any BlackDiamond chassis BlackDiamond 6800 Series Architecture This section describes and shows the architecture of the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis For each chassis the e Front view shows an example of a completely installed chassis with optional I O modules that you can install in the chassis e Rear view shows the back of the chassi
308. vering the power supply bay remove it and save it for future use 3 Ensure that the power supply is right side up A NOTE When you insert a power supply use one hand to support the power supply from the bottom and the other hand to hold the central handle on the front of the power supply 4 Use the central handle to guide the power supply into the bay while supporting the supply from the bottom with your other hand AM CAUTION Do not slam the power supply into the backplane This or other excessive force will cause damage and possibly require the return of the switch 5 Place both hands on each side of the power supply to slowly and evenly slide the power supply into the bay 6 Secure the power supply by tightening the screw on either side of the front panel by using a 2 Phillips screwdriver 7 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components To install an additional power supply repeat steps 1 through 7 102 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Preparing and Attaching the DC Power Supply Cabling Preparing and Attaching the DC Power Supply Cabling After you install the power supply into the chassis you need to attach the keyed connector to provide power to the switch A NOTE Do not connect the DC power source cable to the DC power supply until installation is complete A three wire DC wiring harness is incl
309. w using a or 5 flathead screwdriver to 20 in lbs of torque The cable retention screw is shown in Figure 64 Figure 64 2 stud 48 VDC and RTN lug and 1 stud ground lug Cable retention screw Cable retention screw 6 Replace the plexiglas cover 7 Turn on the DC supply at both the wall breaker and at the power supply breaker 8 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Verifying a Successful Installation After you supply power to the Alpine switch the switch performs a power on self test POST During the POST e All ports are temporarily disabled e The packet LED is off e The power LED is on e The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST If the switch passes the POST the MGMT LED blinks at a slow rate one blink per second If the switch fails the POST the MGMT LED shows a solid yellow light A NOTE See Chapter 9 Alpine 3800 Series Switch Management Module for more information about switch management module LED activity and Chapter 10 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules for more information about I O module LED activity Removing the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC Power Supply You need the following tools and equipment to remove the Alpine 3808 and the Alpine 3804 DC power supplies e ESD preventive wrist strap e 2 Phillips screwdriver e Replaceme
310. wer sensitivity 31 dBm Optical input power maximum 14 dBm Operating wavelength 1310 nm General Total system budget 11 dBm LEDs The FM 24MFi module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the FM 24MFi module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 168 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules Software Requirements The SMMi requires ExtremeWare version 6 1 5 or later to operate the FM 24MFi Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 169 Alpine 3800 Series I O Modules FM 32Ti Module Figure 78 shows the FM 32Ti module Figure 78 FM 32Ti module Module status TIUTE OLITE TT T ecg MIX C Pee Ser Pee gt Port status LEDs 10 100 Mbps ports 38_FM32T The FM 32Ti module has 32 10 100 Mpbs autonegotiating Ethernet ports using standard RJ 45 connectors The FM 32Ti module supports autonegotitation of IOBASE T and 100BASE TX The default configuration of the FM 32Ti module is as follows All ports e Are added to the default VLAN as untagged e Inherit the properties of the default VLAN protocol type VLANid and so on e Operate in autonegotiation mode LEDs The FM 32Ti module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the FM 32Ti module see I O Module LEDs on
311. wer supply towards you After you pull the power supply towards you place both hands underneath the power supply to support it as you pull it out of the chassis A CAUTION The power supply weighs approximately 30 pounds 14 kg AM CAUTION Do not handle the power supply using the DC output bus bars 6 Leave the ESD strap permanently connected to the chassis so that it is always available when you need to handle ESD sensitive components Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 225 BlackDiamond 6800 Series Switch Power Supplies 226 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide BlackDiamond 6800 Series Management Switch Module This chapter describes e Installing MSMs on page 231 e Removing MSMs on page 235 A NOTE Read the information in this chapter thoroughly before you attempt to install or remove the BlackDiamond Management Switch Fabric Module MSM The Management Switch Fabric Module MSM is the internal switch fabric for data that is being sent between I O modules One MSM is required for switch operation however adding more MSMs increases both reliability and throughput Each MSM has two CPUs for protocol processing and network management For full redundancy you can install up to e Four MSMs in the BlackDiamond 6816 switch e Two MSMs in the BlackDiamond 6808 switch e Two MSMs in the BlackDiamond 6804 switch With full redundancy the BlackDiamond 6800 series switch is a fully n
312. witch The Summit Alpine and BlackDiamond specific chapters contain information that is applicable to that family of switch only All other chapters are applicable to any Extreme Networks switch Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 15 Preface Switch Specific Information For switch specific information be sure to read the applicable switch specific chapter For example if you have a BlackDiamond switch and you need to remove and replace an I O module see Removing I O Modules in Chapter 16 for details about how to remove and replace an I O module in a BlackDiamond chassis Common Information For items applicable to any Extreme Networks switch make sure you read the appropriate chapter For example to learn how to prepare your site for installing your Extreme Networks equipment see Chapter 2 Site Preparation This guide also contains appendices that describe e Switch safety issues e Switch specifications e Module specifications Appendix A Safety Information describes important safety issues such as power power cables and fuses Appendix B Switch Technical Specifications is organized according to the family of switch Summit Alpine and BlackDiamond This appendix describes switch specifications such as physical dimensions weight certifications and power supply parameters Information that is common to all switches is described at the end of the appendix Appendix C Module
313. witch components Rack Installation To mount the BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis into a standard 19 inch 48 26 cm rack you need the following tools equipment and resources e Helper bracket provided e A minimum of four appropriate screws to secure the helper bracket not provided e A minimum of eight appropriate screws to secure the chassis into the rack not provided e 1 Phillips screwdriver e A minimum of two people to help install the chassis into the rack To mount the chassis into a rack 1 Mount the helper bracket in the rack using four appropriate screws not provided as shown in Figure 93 Figure 93 Helper bracket for mounting a BlackDiamond 6800 series chassis BDbrackt 2 Place the chassis upright on a secure flat surface with the front of the box facing you 206 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Installing the Chassis 3 Remove the chassis from the box and remove the styrofoam packing material from the chassis To protect the interior of the chassis the chassis comes shipped with sheet metal plates that cover the module slots and the power supply bays Keep the sheet metal plates on the chassis while you insert the chassis into the rack 4 Have a minimum of two people lift and place the empty chassis on the helper bracket and slowly guide the chassis into the rack A NOTE Do not use the fan tray handle to lift and insert the chassis into the rack
314. works Consolidated Hardware Guide Configuring I O Modules WM 1T3i Module Figure 84 shows the WM 1T3i module Figure 84 WM 1T3i module Module reset button WM ATS OJ C pj 45305 J Module status T3 port 10 100 Mbps ports LEDs 38_WM1T3i The WM 1T3i module has one T3 port consisting of a two BNC connectors one for the transmit path and one for the receive path The module also has two general purpose 10 100 Ethernet ports using standard RJ 45 connectors The WM 1T3i also has eight internal loopback ports that allow you to configure bi directional rate limiting without tying up any of the external ports for ingress rate shaping Internal loopback ports are marked with the notation iL when displayed on the command line or with ExtremeWare Vista Web access For the WM 1T3i module use RG 59 75 ohm coax cable LEDs The WM 1T3i module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status For information about the LEDs and their activity on the WM 1T3i module see I O Module LEDs on page 177 Software Requirements The WM 1T3i module requires ExtremeWare version 6 1 5 or later and BootROM 6 5 or later For more information about software requirements and WM 1T3i module configuration see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide and the ExtremeWare Command Reference Guide 1O Module LEDs Table 56 describes the LED activ
315. ws you to view and locally manage the switch configurations See Management Ports in Chapter 1 for more information about the management port 72 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide Summit7i Switch Front View Summit7i Switch Front View As shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23 the Summit7i switch is 4U in height and is available in two port configurations e 28 autosensing 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports with RJ 45 connectors and 4 1000BASE X ports with SC connectors e 28 1000BASE SX ports with MT RJ connectors and 4 1000BASE SX ports with SC connectors Figure 22 Front view of the Summit7i switch with 100BASE TX 1000BASE T ports Module status Console Management LEDs port port Reset Modem Management PCMCIA slot button port port LED Orsua cut Orsus Be PeSareme s 00000000 00000000 ToP ROWS oe OJ 1000 Mbps 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 iA mo pe ii m a m mo 2 E aew ER 7 O0O000000 1000BASE T HO8OO 5 4 GREEN cen thin 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 YD 00000000 m mw a 7 m a m m 2 m 2 08000303A 25 26 27 28 29 30 TETE El 32 a E 2 E E 2 E 2 20 000 aggre Port status 100 1000 Mbps ports Gigabit Ethernet ports LEDs EW_S7iTX Extreme Networks Consolidate
316. xes traffic into a single full duplex gigabit link to the switch fabric To take advantage of this architecture use the same number of ports in each group Table 73 lists the groups for the G24T module Table 73 G24T port groups Ports Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 oa fh OON Populate ports 1 5 9 13 17 and 21 then ports 2 6 10 14 18 and 22 followed by ports 3 7 11 15 19 and 23 and finally ports 4 8 12 16 20 and 24 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 245 BlackDiamond 6800 Series I O Modules A NOTE If congestion is detected on a port with flow control enabled a flow control PAUSE frame is sent out that port The PAUSE frame is not sent out on the other port in the group The G24T module supports distances of up to 100 meters over CAT 5 cabling LEDs The G24T gt module has the following LEDs e Module status e Port status e Diagnostics For information about the LEDs and their activity on the G24T module see I O Module LEDs on page 272 Software Requirements The G24T module requires that you load ExtremeWare version 7 0 1b5 or later and BootROM 7 8 or later on the switch Hardware Requirements The G24TS requires a BlackDiamond chassis using MSM switch fabric module s Use iPower power supplies part numbers 50020 50021 50022 with G24TS modules A BlackDiamond chassis with original power supplies
317. y or the Escape key e Written with brackets such as Return or Esc If you must press two or more keys simultaneously the key names are linked with a plus sign Example Press Ctrl Alt Del Words in italicized type Italics emphasize a point of information or denote new terms at the place where they are defined in the text Related Publications The Extreme Networks switch documentation set includes e Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide this guide e ExtremeWare Software User Guide ExtremeWare Software Command Reference Guide ExtremeWare Release Notes 14 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide About This Guide Documentation for Extreme Networks products is available from the Extreme Networks website at the following location http www extremenetworks com services documentation You can select and download the following Extreme Networks documentation from the Documentation section of the Services page e Release Notes you must have a valid service contract to access the release notes e Software User Guides e Hardware User Guides e White Papers e Troubleshooting Tools e Preventative Maintenance e Instructional Videos e Archives About This Guide This guide describes how to prepare your site and how to install maintain and operate your Extreme Networks switch It contains information on features that are common to all switches as well as switch specific featu
318. ying ZX GBIC Rev 03 26 Summit48si switch 85 installing 31 Summit5i switch 72 long range system budgets 28 Summit7i switch 77 LX100 requirements 27 heat dissipation removing 30 Alpine 3800 series switch 305 safety 29 BlackDiamond switch 110 VAC 307 specifications BlackDiamond switch 220 VAC 307 LX 25 BlackDiamond switch 48 DC 307 LX100 27 Summit i series switch 300 LX70 26 Summit 200 series switch 303 SX 25 helper bracket installing a BlackDiamond switch 206 UTP GBIC 27 helper bracket installing a Summit switch 94 ZX GBIC 25 helper bracket installing an Alpine switch 125 ZX GBIC Rev 03 26 hot insert power supply Summit48si switch 82 types 24 humidity 44 UTP requirements 27 GM 16T3 module 162 l dimensions 312 electromagnetic compatibility 312 I O ees les Alpine escription 151 environmental standard 312 environmental requirements 331 weight 312 hot swappin 180 182 GM 16X3 module 160 panera 8 ae dimensions 312 LEDs 8 177 electromagnetic compatibility 312 remon 182 environmental standard 312 emovng verifying the installation 181 weight 312 F i I O modules BlackDiamond GM 4Si module 157 d taaa d escription 237 dimensions 311 3 ai environmental requirements 331 electromagnetic compatibility 311 h ot swapping 273 275 environmental standard 311 installin 273 telecommunications standard 311 8 LEDs 272 weight 311 Extreme Networks Consolidated Hardware Guide 337 removing verifying the installa

Consolidated Hardware Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents